RU2651066C2 - Modular motor driven surgical instruments with status indication arrangements - Google Patents

Abstract

FIELD: medical equipment.

SUBSTANCE: invention relates to medical equipment and can be used with a surgical stapling instrument. End effector includes a housing that is configured for operable attachment to a surgical instrument, and a status assembly arrangement for provide an indication on the housing of a linear location of at least one of the first and second end effector actuators. First end effector drive system is configured to linearly move the first end effector actuator in response to first rotary motions. Second end effector drive system is configured to linearly move the second end effector actuator between a beginning and ending position in response to second rotary motions.

EFFECT: proposed device can be used with a surgical stapling instrument.

20 cl, 121 dwg

Description

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This unconditional patent application claims priority in accordance with §119 (e) of Art. 35 of the US Code of provisional application for US patent No. 61 / 812,365 "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MANY FUNCTIONS IMPLEMENTED BY ONE ENGINE", filed April 16, 2013, which is fully incorporated herein by reference. This unconditional patent application also claims priority in accordance with §119 (e) of Art. 35 of the US Code of provisional application for US patent No. 61 / 812,376 "LINEAR CUTTING TOOL WITH A DRIVE", filed April 16, 2013, which is fully incorporated herein by reference. This unconditional patent application also claims priority in accordance with §119 (e) of Art. 35 of the US Code of provisional application for US patent No. 61 / 812,382 "LINEAR CUTTING TOOL WITH ENGINE AND GUN HANDLE", filed April 16, 2013, which is fully incorporated herein by reference. This unconditional patent application claims priority in accordance with §119 (e) of Art. 35 of the US Code of provisional application for US patent No. 61 / 812,385 "HANDLE OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MANY ACTIVATING ENGINES AND ENGINE CONTROLLED", filed April 16, 2013, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. This unconditional patent application also claims priority in accordance with §119 (e) of Art. 35 of the US Code of provisional application for US patent No. 61 / 812,372 "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MANY FUNCTIONS IMPLEMENTED BY ONE ENGINE", filed April 16, 2013, which is fully incorporated herein by reference.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Various forms of the invention relate to surgical instruments, and in various embodiments, to surgical cutting and stapling instruments and cassettes with brackets for them, which are configured to dissect and staple tissue with braces.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Various elements and advantages of the present invention, as well as methods for achieving them, will become more apparent, and the invention itself will become more clear by reference to the following description of embodiments of the present invention in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, moreover:

in FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a modular surgical system comprising a surgical instrument with a drive and three interchangeable end effectors;

in FIG. 2 is a perspective side view of a surgical instrument with a drive, the portion of the handle body removed for clarity;

in FIG. 3 is a partial exploded view of the components of the surgical instrument assembly of FIG. 2;

in FIG. 4 presents another view with a spatial separation of the components of the surgical instrument depicted in FIG. 2 and 3;

in FIG. 5 is a side elevational view of a surgical instrument with a drive, the handle body portion being removed;

in FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an electric drive system and a transmission assembly, wherein the transmission assembly is in a first drive position, and activation of the engine will activate the first drive system of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 2-5;

in FIG. 6A is a perspective view of an alternative transmission carriage with locking mechanisms;

in FIG. 6B is a perspective view of an electric drive system and a transmission assembly including a transmission carriage shown in FIG. 6A, wherein the transmission unit is in the first drive position, wherein activating the engine will activate the first drive system, and the second drive system is blocked by locking mechanisms;

in FIG. 6C is a perspective view of an electric drive system and a transmission assembly shown in FIG. 6B, wherein the transmission unit is in the second drive position, wherein activating the engine will activate the second drive system, and the first drive system is blocked by locking mechanisms;

in FIG. 7 is yet another perspective view of the electric drive system and transmission assembly shown in FIG. 6, wherein the transmission unit is in the second drive position, wherein activation of the engine will activate the second drive system;

in FIG. 8 is a side elevational view of another surgical instrument with a drive, wherein a portion of the handle body and other portions thereof are omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 9 is a perspective view of an engine, transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems of a surgical instrument shown in FIG. 8, wherein the transmission assembly is in a first drive position;

in FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional elevational view of an engine, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. 9, wherein the transmission assembly is in a first drive position;

in FIG. 11 is a different perspective view of an engine, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. 9 and 10, wherein the transmission unit is in a second drive position;

in FIG. 12 is yet another cross-sectional view in vertical view of the engine, transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. 9-11, wherein the transmission unit is in a second drive position;

in FIG. 13 is a partial rear perspective view of a portion of another surgical instrument with a drive;

in FIG. 14 is a side elevational view of the engine, transmission assembly, and the first and second drive systems of the surgical instrument of FIG. 13;

in FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the transmission assembly of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 13 and 14, in a first position of the actuator;

in FIG. 16 is another cross-sectional view of the transmission assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 13-15, in the second position of the drive;

in FIG. 17 is a perspective view of another construction of a surgical surgical instrument with a drive, the body portion being removed for clarity;

in FIG. 18 is a perspective view of an engine, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems of a surgical instrument of FIG. 17;

in FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a spatial separation of engine components, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. eighteen;

in FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of portions of an engine, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. 18 and 19, wherein the transmission shaft assembly is in a first drive position;

in FIG. 21 is a different cross-sectional view of portions of an engine, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. 20, wherein the transmission rod assembly is in a first drive position;

in FIG. 22 is a perspective view of another engine, transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems of one form of surgical instrument of the present invention;

in FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a spatial separation of engine components, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. 22;

in FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of an engine, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. 22 and 23, wherein the transmission unit is in a first drive position;

in FIG. 25 is another cross-sectional view of an engine, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems shown in FIG. 22-24, wherein the transmission assembly is in a second drive position;

in FIG. 26 is yet another cross-sectional view of the engine and transmission assembly of FIG. 22-25, wherein the transmission assembly is in a first drive position;

in FIG. 27 is another cross-sectional view of an engine and a transmission assembly shown in FIG. 22-26, and the transmission unit is in the second drive position;

in FIG. 28 is a side elevational view of a portion of another surgical instrument with a drive, the portion of the body removed for clarity;

in FIG. 29 is a perspective view of a portion of another surgical instrument with a drive, the portion of the body removed for clarity;

in FIG. 30 is a front perspective view of a drive unit with first and second rotary drive systems;

in FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the drive unit shown in FIG. thirty;

in FIG. 32 is a perspective view of the drive unit shown in FIG. 31 and 32, from which the housing is removed;

in FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the spatial separation of the components of a mechanical coupling system for the functional interconnection of four rotational drive shafts;

in FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of a surgical end effector, wherein a portion of the end effector body is removed for clarity;

in FIG. 35 is another front perspective view of the surgical end effector of FIG. 34, wherein portions of the closure system and lower jaw are omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 36 is a perspective perspective view of the spatial separation of the components of the surgical end effector shown in FIG. 34 and 35;

in FIG. 37 is a side elevational view of the surgical end effector shown in FIG. 33-36, with a portion of the body omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 38 is a left side perspective view of another end effector design, a portion of the end effector housing being omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the spatial separation of the components of the end effector shown in FIG. 38;

in FIG. 40 is a perspective side view of the structure of the end effector shown in FIG. 37 and 38, wherein another portion of the end effector is omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector structure shown in FIG. 38-40;

in FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view of another embodiment of a surgical end effector;

in FIG. 43 is a partial general view with a spatial separation of the components of the surgical end effector shown in FIG. 42;

in FIG. 44 is another partial perspective view of a portion of the surgical end effector of FIG. 42 and 43;

in FIG. 45 is another cross-sectional view of the surgical end effector of FIG. 42-44;

in FIG. 46 is a perspective view of an end effector structure with a drive release assembly;

in FIG. 47 is a partial perspective view of the surgical end effector of FIG. 46, some portions of which are omitted for clarity and the proximal portion of the drive mechanism of the closing system is disconnected from the distal portion of the drive mechanism of the closing system;

in FIG. 48 is a partial perspective view of the surgical end effector of FIG. 46 and 47, whereby its portions are omitted for clarity, the distal connecting element is installed in the groove of the proximal connecting element, and the drive connecting pin is removed from them;

in FIG. 49 is another partial perspective view of the surgical end effector of FIG. 48, showing portions of the starting system of the end effector;

in FIG. 50 is a perspective view of another construction of a surgical end effector;

in FIG. 50A is an enlarged view of a portion of the surgical end effector shown in FIG. fifty;

in FIG. 51 is a perspective view of a portion of the end effector shown in FIG. 50, wherein a portion of the housing is omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 52 is yet another perspective view of the end effector shown in FIG. 50 and 51, with portions of the housing and closure system omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 53 is a different perspective view of the end effector shown in FIG. 50-52, the portions of the closing system and the portion of the housing omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 54 is a perspective view of another end effector that is equipped with a drive release assembly;

in FIG. 55 is a side elevational view of the end effector shown in FIG. 54;

in FIG. 56 is a perspective view of a portion of the end effector shown in FIG. 54 and 55, wherein the portion of the end effector casing is omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 57 is a different perspective view of the end effector shown in FIG. 54-56, on which the tool head is in the closed position;

in FIG. 58 is another partial perspective view of the end effector shown in FIG. 57, wherein a portion of the end effector casing is omitted for clarity;

in FIG. 59 is a different perspective view of the end effector shown in FIG. 58, the drive connecting pin being removed;

in FIG. 60 is another perspective view of the end effector shown in FIG. 59, with the drive actuator pin removed and the beam assembly of the closing actuator displaced proximally to open the tool head;

in FIG. 61 is a block diagram of a modular surgical instrument with a drive, comprising a grip portion and a stem portion;

in FIG. 62 is a table showing the total execution time of the working cycle and the requirements for the load current for various operations of various device trunks;

in FIG. 63, which is divided into FIG. 63-A and 63-B, presents a detailed diagram of the electrical system in the handle section of a modular surgical instrument with a drive;

in FIG. 64 is a block diagram of an electric system of a grip and stem sections of a modular surgical instrument with a drive;

in FIG. 65 shows a mechanical switching motion control system for eliminating microprocessor control of engine functions;

in FIG. 66 is a perspective view of a connecting structure comprising a connector housing and a pair of sockets within a connector housing in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 67 is a perspective cross-sectional view of the connecting structure shown in FIG. 66, representing a pair of drive elements disconnected from a pair of sockets, and further showing a connecting structure in an unlocked configuration in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 68 is a perspective cross-sectional view of the connecting structure shown in FIG. 66, showing a pair of drive elements coupled to a pair of sockets, and further showing a connecting structure in a locked configuration in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 69 is a perspective cross-sectional view of the connecting structure shown in FIG. 66, showing a pair of drive elements coupled to a pair of sockets, and further showing a connecting structure in an unlocked configuration in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the insert of the connecting structure shown in FIG. 66, in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 71 is a perspective view of a socket of the connecting structure shown in FIG. 66, in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 72 is a perspective view of a latch of the connecting structure shown in FIG. 66, in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional elevational view of a surgical end effector nozzle for use with a surgical instrument handle in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 74 is a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the drive systems of the surgical end effector nozzle shown in FIG. 73, in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 75 is a perspective view of a handle for a surgical instrument, the handle comprising a drive system having a first output drive unit and a second output drive unit in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the drive system shown in FIG. 75, in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional elevational view of the handle depicted in FIG. 75, showing a drive system cooperating with a first output drive unit and released from a second output drive unit in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional elevational view of the drive system shown in FIG. 75, showing a drive system cooperating with a second output drive unit and released from interaction with a first output drive unit in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention;

in FIG. 79 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a surgical instrument including a rotatable drive shaft closing a drive driven by said drive shaft and a trigger drive driven by said drive shaft, wherein the closing drive is shown in a partially open configuration, and the starter drive is shown in an unreleased configuration;

in FIG. 80 is a perspective view of a rotatable drive shaft shown in FIG. 79;

in FIG. 81 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the surgical instrument of FIG. 79, with a closing actuator in an open configuration and a starting actuator in an unstarted configuration;

in FIG. 82 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the surgical instrument of FIG. 79, with a closing actuator in a closed configuration and a starting actuator in a non-running configuration;

in FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the surgical instrument of FIG. 79, with a closing drive in a closed configuration and a starting drive in a running configuration;

in FIG. 84 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the surgical instrument of FIG. 79, with a start-up drive in a drawn configuration and a closing drive during re-opening;

in FIG. 85 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector and the trunk of a surgical instrument, depicted in a closed, non-launched configuration;

in FIG. 86 is a perspective view of a transmission for use with the surgical instrument depicted in FIG. 85, in a configuration corresponding to the configuration shown in FIG. 85;

in FIG. 87 is an exploded view of the transmission components shown in FIG. 86;

in FIG. 88 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end effector and a barrel shown in FIG. 85 depicted in an open, non-running configuration;

in FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the transmission depicted in FIG. 86, in a configuration corresponding to the configuration shown in FIG. 88;

in FIG. 90 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector and the barrel shown in FIG. 85 shown in a closed, non-running configuration;

in FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the transmission of FIG. 86, in a configuration corresponding to the configuration shown in FIG. 90;

in FIG. 92 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector and the barrel shown in FIG. 85 shown in a closed, running configuration;

in FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the transmission depicted in FIG. 86, in a configuration corresponding to the configuration shown in FIG. 92;

in FIG. 94 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;

in FIG. 95 is an exploded view of the components of the handle of the surgical stapling instrument shown in FIG. 94;

in FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the components of the end effector of the surgical stapling instrument shown in FIG. 94;

in FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the engine and gear assembly of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 94;

in FIG. 98 is a cross-sectional elevational view of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 94;

in FIG. 99 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment depicted in an open, unfixed state;

in FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 99, in a closed, unsecured state;

in FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 99, in a closed, locked state;

in FIG. 102 is a horizontal perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument shown in FIG. 99;

in FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 99;

in FIG. 104 is a detailed cross-sectional view of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 99;

in FIG. 105 is an exploded view of the components of the starting drive of the surgical stapling instrument shown in FIG. 99;

in FIG. 106 is an exploded view of the components of the closure drive of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 99;

in FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of a surgical stapling instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising a handle, a barrel, and an end effector;

in FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the handle of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 107 shown in an open configuration;

in FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the handle of the surgical stapling instrument shown in FIG. 107 shown in a closed configuration;

in FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the handle of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 107, with some components removed;

in FIG. 111 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising a handle and a barrel;

in FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 111, the handle being separate from the barrel;

in FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the components of the surgical stapling instrument shown in FIG. 111;

in FIG. 114 is a partial cross-sectional view of the handle depicted in FIG. 111, showing a transmission operably interacting with the closure system of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 111;

in FIG. 115 is a partial cross-sectional view of the handle depicted in FIG. 111, showing the transmission depicted in FIG. 114, operatively interacting with the trigger system of the surgical stapling instrument shown in FIG. 111;

in FIG. 116 is an exploded view of the transmission components shown in FIG. 114;

in FIG. 117 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment, some components removed and shown in an open configuration;

in FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument of FIG. 117, some components removed and shown in a closed configuration;

in FIG. 119 is a perspective view of another construction of the end effector and an embodiment of the block of brackets to it before installing the block of brackets in the end effector;

in FIG. 120 is yet another perspective view of an end effector and a block of staples shown in FIG. 119, the block of brackets mounted in the end effector; and

in FIG. 121 is another perspective view of an end effector and a block of staples shown in FIG. 120, wherein the element of the bracket block holder is removed from it.

Corresponding elements in different views are indicated by corresponding symbols. The illustrations appended to this application are intended solely to demonstrate preferred embodiments of the invention, and should not be construed as limiting the scope of the present invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The applicant of this application owns the following patent applications filed March 1, 2013, each of which is fully incorporated into this document by reference:

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 295, entitled “HINGED SURGICAL SURGERY TOOLS FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 323, entitled “ROTATING HINGED ARTICLES WITH POWER SUPPLIES FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 338, entitled “DISC SWITCH MECHANISMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 499, entitled "ELECTROMECHANICAL SURGICAL DEVICE WITH SIGNAL RELAY MECHANISM";

- US patent application serial number 13/782 460, entitled "MULTI-PROCESSOR ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS";

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 358, entitled “KNOBS FOR KNOB SWITCH FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 481, entitled “END CLAMP RECTIFIED WITH THE SENSOR DURING EXTRACTION THROUGH A TROCAR”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 518, entitled “METHODS FOR MANAGING SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH REMOVABLE WORKING PARTS”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 375, entitled “ROTATING SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH POWER SUPPLIES WITH MANY DEGREES OF FREEDOM”; and

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782 536, entitled “SOFT SURGICAL RESTRICTOR FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENT”, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

The applicant of this application also owns the following patent applications filed March 14, 2013, each of which is fully incorporated into this document by reference:

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803 097, entitled “HINGED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTAINING THE START-UP DRIVE”;

- US Patent Application Serial 13/803 193, entitled “CONTROL DEVICES FOR DRIVING ELEMENT OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803 053, entitled “INTERCHANGEABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES FOR USE WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENT”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803 086, entitled “HINGED SURGICAL TOOL CONTAINING A HINGE LOCK”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803 210, entitled “SENSOR DESIGN FOR ABSOLUTE POSITIONING SYSTEM FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803 148, entitled “MULTIFUNCTIONAL ENGINE FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803 066, entitled “DESIGN LOCKING DRIVE SYSTEM FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

- US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803 117, entitled “HINGED CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HINGED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

- US patent application Ser. No. 13 / 803,130, entitled “AUTO ADJUSTMENT STRUCTURES OF THE DRIVE MECHANISM FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”; and

- US patent application Ser. No. 13 / 803,159, entitled “METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WORKING WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENT”.

The applicant of this application owns the following patent applications filed March 25, 2014, each of which is fully incorporated into this document by reference:

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226.106, entitled “POWER DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226,099, entitled “STERILIZATION CHECK DIAGRAM”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226,094, entitled “CHECK THE NUMBER OF REPLACEMENT OF THE BATTERY / NUMBER OF PROCEDURES”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226,117, entitled “POWER DISTRIBUTION BY USING THE SLEEPING MODE OF THE SEGMENTED SCHEME AND MANAGING THE EXIT FROM THE SLEEPING MODE”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226.075, entitled “SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MODULAR POWER SUPPLIES AND WITH REMOVABLE STEM ASSEMBLIES”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226,093, entitled “FEEDBACK ALGORITHMS FOR MANUAL EMERGENCY SYSTEMS OF SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226,116, entitled “SURGICAL INSTRUMENT USING ADAPTATION BY SENSORS”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226.071, entitled “SURGICAL INSTRUMENT MANAGEMENT SCHEME WITH A SAFETY PROCESSOR”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14/226 097, entitled “SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTAINING INTERACTIVE SYSTEMS”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14/226 126, entitled “DOCKING SYSTEMS FOR USE WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226,133, entitled “MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226,081, entitled “SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING A SEGMENTED DIAGRAM”;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226.076, entitled “POWER DISTRIBUTION USING A SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND VARIABLE VOLTAGE PROTECTION”;

US patent application Ser. No. 14 / 226,111, entitled “SYSTEM OF SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT”; and

US Patent Application Ser. No. 14 / 226.125, entitled “SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTAINING A TURNING BAR”.

The applicant of this application also owns the following patent applications filed on the same day, each of which is fully incorporated into this document by reference:

- US patent application Ser. No. ___________, entitled “SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH A DRIVE WITH LOCKING DOUBLE DRIVE SHAFT”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END7406USNP / 140054;

- US patent application Ser. No. __________________, entitled “SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTAINING A CLOSING DRIVE AND START-UP DRIVE CONTROLLED BY ONE ROTATING EXTERNAL DEVICE”, Patent Attorney File No. END7007US;

- US patent application Ser. No. ___________, entitled “BARRING OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTAINING SWITCHES FOR MANAGING THE WORK OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END7408USNP / 140056;

- US patent application Ser. No. ___________, entitled “LINEAR SURGICAL STAPLING TOOL WITH POWER SUPPLY”, file of patent attorney No. END7409USNP / 140057;

- US patent application Ser. No. ___________, entitled “TRANSMISSION DESIGN FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENT”, file of the patent attorney No. END7410USNP / 140058;

- US patent application Ser. No. ___________, entitled “MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH A DRIVE WITH LEVELING ELEMENTS FOR ALIGNING A ROTARY DRIVE SHAFT WITH A SHAFT OF A SURGICAL END EFFECTOR”, No. 11 EN1400;

- US patent application Ser. No. ___________, entitled “SURGICAL STAPLING TOOL WITH POWER SUPPLY”, Patent Attorney File No. END7412USNP / 140060; and

- US patent application Ser. No. ___________, entitled “DESIGN FOR DISCONNECTING A DRIVE SYSTEM FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT”, Patent Attorney File No. END7413USNP / 140061.

To provide a complete understanding of the principles of operation of the design, operation, production and use of the devices and methods described herein, some examples of embodiments are described. One or more examples of these embodiments are shown in the accompanying drawings. It will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that the devices and methods specifically described herein and illustrated in the accompanying drawings are non-limiting embodiments and that the scope of various embodiments of the present invention is defined solely by the claims. Features shown or described in connection with one embodiment may be combined with features of other embodiments. It is intended that the scope of the present invention include such modifications and variations.

In the present description, a reference to “various embodiments”, “some embodiments”, “one embodiment”, “an embodiment” or the like means that a particular feature, design, or characteristic described in connection with an embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present invention. Thus, the phrases “in various embodiments”, “in some embodiments”, “in one embodiment” or “in an embodiment”, or the like, in the present description do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. Moreover, specific features, structures, or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. Thus, specific features, structures, or characteristics illustrated or described in connection with one embodiment may, without limitation, be combined in whole or in part with the features, structures, or characteristics of one or more other embodiments. It is intended that the scope of the present invention include such modifications and variations.

The terms "proximal" and "distal" in this document are defined with respect to the physician managing the handle of the surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the part lying closer to the doctor, and the term "distal" refers to the part removed from the doctor. It is also proposed for convenience and clarity in relation to the drawings to use in this document such spatial terms as “vertical”, “horizontal”, “up” and “down”. However, since the use of surgical instruments involves many orientations and provisions, these terms should not be interpreted as limiting and (or) absolute.

In laparoscopic manipulations and surgical operations with minimal intervention, various typical devices and methods are used. However, specialists in this field will be able to appreciate the various methods and devices described in this document, which can be used in numerous surgical procedures and applications, including, for example, those associated with open surgical procedures. Going deeper into this detailed description, those skilled in the art will also be able to appreciate that the various apparatuses presented in this document can be inserted into the human body in any way, such as through a natural hole, through an incision or puncture in the tissue, etc. Work blocks or end clamp blocks of instruments can be inserted directly into the human body or can be inserted through access devices equipped with a working chute through which the end clamp and the elongated shaft of the surgical apparatus can be advanced.

Turning to the drawings, in which like numbers denote like components, in FIG. 1 shows a modular surgical instrument system, essentially indicated by paragraph 2, which in one form includes a surgical instrument 10 with a drive that can be used in combination with various surgical end effectors, for example, end effectors 1000, 2000 and 3000. In the shown embodiment the implementation of a surgical instrument with an electric motor 10 includes a housing 12, consisting of a handle 14 made with the possibility of capture, manipulation and activation by a doctor. In the course of this detailed description, it will be understood that various unique and new designs of drive systems presented in combination with the handle 14, as well as various designs of end effectors described herein, can also be effectively used in combination with robotic surgical instruments. Thus, the term “housing” can also refer to a housing or similar portion of a robotic system that can accommodate or otherwise functionally hold various forms of drive systems presented herein, and which can be configured to generate control movements suitable for use in activating end effector designs described herein and their corresponding equivalent structures. The term “frame” may refer to a part of a hand-held surgical instrument. The term “frame” may also be a portion of a motor-driven system of a robot or surgical instrument with robotic control and / or a portion of a robotic system that can be used to functionally control a surgical instrument. For example, the drive system designs and end effector designs described herein can be used with various robotic systems, tools, components, and methods set forth in US patent application Ser. No. 13 / 118,241, entitled “SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH TURNING INSTALLATIONS FOR BRACKET INSTALLATION”, currently published US patent application No. 2012/0298719, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

As shown in FIG. 2-5, the handle 14 may comprise a pair of handle body segments 16 and 18, which may be connected by screws, latches, adhesive, and the like. In the shown construction, the handle body segments 16 and 18 together form a pistol grip portion 19 that can be gripped by the hand and which can be manipulated by the doctor. As will be further described in more detail, the handle 14 functionally holds two rotary drive systems 20, 40 configured to generate and apply various control movements to the respective sections of the drive shafts of the particular end effector connected to them. The first rotary drive system 20 can, for example, be used to apply “closing” movements to the corresponding structure of the closing drive shaft functionally held in the end effector, and the second rotational drive system 40 can be used to apply “starting” movements to the corresponding design of the starting drive shaft in attached to it end effector.

The first and second rotary drive systems 20, 40 are driven by an engine 80 through a unique new “shifting” transmission assembly 60, which essentially switches power / movement between two power units. The first rotary drive system 20 comprises a first rotational drive shaft 22, rotatably held in the housing 12 of the handle 14 and forming the axis of the first drive shaft “FDA-FDA”. The first drive gear 24 is secured with a key or otherwise rotatably attached to the first rotational drive shaft 22 to rotate with it about the axis of the first FDA-FDA drive shaft. Similarly, the second rotary drive system 40 comprises a second rotational drive shaft 42, rotatably held in the housing 12 of the handle 14 and forming the axis of the second SDA-SDA drive shaft. In at least one design, the axis of the second drive shaft SDA-SDA is offset, parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the first drive shaft FDA-FDA. In this context, the term “offset” means that the axes of the first and second drive shafts, for example, do not match. The second rotary drive shaft 42 has a second drive gear 44 that is secured with a key or otherwise rotatably attached to the second rotary drive shaft 42 to rotate with it about the axis of the second SDA-SDA drive shaft. In addition, the second drive shaft 42 has an intermediate drive gear 46 rotatably mounted thereon so that the intermediate drive gear 46 can rotate freely on the second rotational drive shaft 42 about the axis of the second SDA-SDA drive shaft.

As shown in FIG. 2-5, in one form, the engine 80 comprises an engine output shaft 81 to which the drive gear 82 of the engine is attached without turning. The drive gear 82 of the engine is made with the possibility of engaging "functional" interaction with the transmission unit 60, which will be further described in detail below. In at least one form, the transmission assembly 60 includes a transmission carriage 62 held axially between the drive gear 82 and the gears 44 and 46 on the second rotational drive shaft 42. For example, the transmission carriage 62 may be slidably mounted on a support shaft 63 mounted in the housing 12 on the shaft bracket 61 so that the line of action of the transfer carriage is perpendicular to the gear block of the rotary drive systems. The shaft bracket 61 is made with the possibility of rigid support in the grooves or other elements inside the housing 10. The transmitting carriage 62 includes a gear of the carriage 64, held rotatably on the support shaft 63, and configured to selectively engage with gears 44 and 46 while being while in the drive interaction with the drive gear 82. In the design shown in FIG. 2-5, the transfer carriage 62 is operatively attached to a shifter or “shift mechanism” 70 configured to move the transfer carriage 62 axially between the “first drive position” and the “second drive position”. For example, in one form, the biasing mechanism 70 includes a biasing solenoid 71 held within the housing 12 of the handle 14. The biasing solenoid 71 may be a solenoid with two stable positions or, for example, may be a “two position spring loaded” solenoid. The design shown, for example, includes a spring 72 that biases the transfer carriage 62 in the distal direction “DD” to the first drive position, the gear 64 of the carriage being in gear interaction with the intermediate drive gear 46, and also in gear connection with the drive gear 82. In this first driving position, activation of the engine 80 will cause the gears 82, 46 and 24 to rotate, which will ultimately result in the rotation of the first drive shaft 22. As will be described in further detail below, the shifting salt IAO 71 may be activated by a trigger hook 90, pivotally mounted on the housing 12 of the handle 14 as shown in FIG. 2 and 5. In the embodiment shown, the trigger 90 is rotatably supported on the trigger barrel 92 mounted in the handle 14. The trigger 90 is typically biased to the inactive position by the trigger spring 94. See FIG. 3. The trigger 90 is installed with the possibility of functional activation of the trigger switch 96, functionally installed on the node 100 of the board with the control circuit. In the presented embodiment, activation of the trigger 90 leads to the activation of the bias solenoid 71. As described below in more detail with reference to FIG. 61, 63, 64, the handle processor 7024 supplies a drive signal to the bias solenoid 7032 (71). Thus, again returning to FIG. 2-5, activation of the trigger 90 causes the shifting solenoid 71 to pull the transfer carriage 62 in the proximal direction “PD”, thereby translating the carriage gear 64 into gearing with the second drive gear 44. See FIG. 7. Activating the engine 80 while the carriage gear 64 is in gear engagement with the drive gear 82 and the second drive gear 44 will cause the second drive shaft 42 to rotate about the axis of the second SDA drive shaft. As can also be seen in FIG. 2-5, the movable transmission assembly 60 may also include an indicator system 74, which includes a pair of switches 75 and 76 operatively coupled to the control board 100, as well as the transmission indicator light 77. The switches 75, 76 are for detecting the position of the transfer carriage 62, as a result of which the control system activates the indicator light 77 depending on the position of the transfer carriage 62. For example, power supply to the indicator light 77 can be supplied when the transfer carriage 62 is in the first drive position. This gives the doctor an indication that activating the engine 80 will activate the first drive system 20.

Various surgical instruments described herein may also include a transmission unit 60 ', which is substantially identical to the transmission unit 60, but also includes a locking unit or mechanism (generally indicated at 65) for locking the first and second drive systems 20, 40 to prevent their accidental operation when such operation is not provided. For example, in FIG. 6A shows an alternative gear carriage 62 ', which includes a first drive locking member 66 and a second drive locking member 68. The first drive locking member 66 includes a first gear-engaging member or tooth on the gear carriage 62', which is gear-engaged the second drive gear 44, when the carriage gear 64 is in driving interaction with the intermediate gear 46 (i.e., when the transmission assembly 60 'is in the first drive position). See FIG. 6B. Therefore, when the transmission unit 60 ’is in the first drive position, the first drive locking member 66 is in gear engagement with the second drive gear 44, preventing its relative rotation when the first drive shaft 22 is rotated as described above. Similarly, when the transmission assembly 60 'is in the second drive position (i.e., the carriage gear 64 is in gear interaction with the second drive gear 44), the second drive locking member 68 is in gear interaction with the intermediate drive gear 46. See FIG. . 6C. Therefore, when the transmission unit 60 ′ is in the second drive position, the second drive locking member 68 prevents rotation of the intermediate gear 46, while also preventing the rotation of the first drive gear 24. For this reason, when the doctor drives the engine 80 to activate the first drive system 20, the second drive system 40 is locked in place. Similarly, when the doctor drives the second drive system 40, the first drive system 20 is locked in place.

The engine control system 80, as described later in this document in relation to FIG. 61, 63, 64, can be programmed so that it always stops in such an orientation that one tooth of gears 42, 44 was located vertically or in a different predetermined position, depending on the orientation of the other corresponding gear. This element is designed to avoid pairing between the teeth of the gears when shifting. When shifting, the locking elements also shift and block the position of the non-rotating gear block. When used in combination with an end effector, which includes a cassette / stop design or other clamping structure, another advantage of blocking a gear block that does not rotate (i.e. without power) is to keep the clamp / stop in a stable position during start-up.

The motor 80 may be a DC brush driving motor with a maximum turning speed of, for example, approximately 25,000 rpm. In other configurations, the motor may include a brushless motor, a wireless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor, including motors that may be suitable for autoclave sterilization. The engine 80 may receive power from a power source 84, which in one form may include a power supply 86, stored with the possibility of extraction in the handle 14. For example, as seen in FIG. 2-5, the power supply 86 can be placed with the possibility of retrieving the handle 14 inside the pistol grip portion 19. To access the power supply unit 86, the doctor removes the removable cap 17 attached to the pistol grip portion 19. The power supply 86 can functionally accommodate multiple batteries (not shown). Each battery may be, for example, a lithium ion (“LI”) or other suitable battery. The power supply 86 is designed for removable functional connection with the node 100 of the control circuit board, which is also functionally connected to the motor 80 and installed inside the handle 14. A number of series-connected batteries can be used as a power source for the surgical instrument. In addition, the power supply 84 may be replaceable and / or rechargeable and, in at least one embodiment, may include, for example, CR123 batteries. The engine 80 may be activated by a "start-switch-swing" 110, mounted to rotate to the pistol portion 19 of the handle 14. The start-switch-swing 110 is configured to activate the first switch 112 of the engine, functionally connected to the control board 100. The first switch 112 of the engine can represent a push switch, actuated by turning the start switch-swing 110 with the introduction of it into contact with it. Activating the first engine switch 112 causes the engine 80 to be activated so that the drive gear 82 rotates in a first rotational direction. The second engine switch 114 is also connected to the circuit board 100 and is selectively contacted with the start-up switch-swing 110. Activating the second engine switch 114 causes the engine 80 to be activated so that the drive gear 82 rotates in the second direction. For example, in the process of application, the voltage polarity provided by the power source 84 allows the electric motor 80 to operate in a clockwise direction, the voltage polarity applied to the electric motor by the battery being reversed for the electric motor 80 to operate counterclockwise. As in other forms described herein, the handle 14 may also include a sensor configured to detect directions in which the drive systems move. One specific embodiment of an engine 80 is described herein with reference to FIG. 61, 63, 64, which describes a brushless DC motor 7038. The DC motor 7038 may be suitable for autoclaving.

In FIG. 8-12 show another form of surgical instrument 10 ', which may be identical to surgical instrument 10, except for the differences below. The components of the surgical instrument 10 ', the same as the components of the above-described surgical instrument 10, will be indicated by the same numbers. The components of the surgical instrument 10 ', which may be similar in operation but not identical to the corresponding components of the surgical instrument 10, will be denoted by the same component numbers in the combination “’ ’’ ”or in some cases“ ″ ”. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. 8, the axis of the first FDA drive shaft is offset and parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the second SDA drive shaft. As shown, for example, in FIG. 9, the transmission unit 60 and, more specifically, the transmission carriage 62ʺ may be manually movable by the traction unit 120 operably connected to the trigger 90 '. As can be seen, for example, in this FIG., The traction assembly 120 includes a first transmission rod 122, which is operatively connected to the trigger 90, axially and operably connected to the transmission fork 124. The transmission fork 124 has a movable pin connection to a 62ʺ transmission carriage. Thus, the actuation of the trigger 90 ’leads to the axial movement of the transfer carriage 62ʺ. Therefore, it is understood that the traction unit 120 essentially performs an activating movement, similar to the movement of the biasing solenoid 71, which has been described above. In the context of such an embodiment, as applied to moving the transfer carriage 62ʺ, the term “manually movable” refers to moving the transfer carriage between the first and second drive positions without using electricity or other power devices, except for pulling the trigger 90 '.

As can also be seen in FIG. 8-12, the second drive gear 44 'is separated from the intermediate gear 46' on the second drive shaft 42 'by a spacer 45. The second drive gear 44' is secured with a key or otherwise attached without turning to the second drive shaft 42 ', while the intermediate drive gear the gear 46 'is rotatably mounted on the second drive shaft 42' and rotates freely relative to it. In one form, for example, the distal drive gear 130 is held in gear engagement with the intermediate drive gear 46 '. Similarly, the proximal drive gear 136 is held in gear engagement with the second drive gear 44 '. However, in this design, the transmission carriage 62ʺ also includes a centrally located transmission gear assembly 140 operably connected to the transmission carriage 62 'with the possibility of axial movement along with it. As shown in FIG. 8-12, the transmission gear assembly 140 includes a centrally located shear drive gear 142, which is in sliding gear engagement with the engine drive gear 82. Consequently, turning the drive gear 82 of the engine rotates the shift drive gear 142. In addition, the proximal bevel gear 144 is attached to the shift drive gear 142 for selectively engaged with the proximal gear socket 146 attached to the proximal drive gear 136. Similarly passing distally bevel drive gear 148 is designed for selective gear interaction with the socket 150 of the distal gear, pr Fixing to the distal drive sprocket 130.

When the doctor desires to activate the first drive system 20, the doctor moves the trigger 90 ′ to move the gear gear assembly 140 along the axis, introducing the distally bevel gear 148 in contact with the distal gear socket 150 attached to the distal gear 130. See FIG. 8-10. In this position, the operation of the engine 80 will cause the drive gear 82 of the engine, the shift drive gear 142, the distal drive gear 130, the intermediate drive gear 46 ', the first drive gear 24 and the first drive shaft 22 to rotate. When the doctor wants to activate the second drive system 40, the doctor moves the trigger 90 'to the position shown in FIG. 11 and 12, thereby engaging the proximal conical drive gear 144 in adjacent gear engagement with the proximal gear socket 146 attached to the proximal drive gear 136. In this position, the operation of the engine 80 will cause the drive gear 82 to shift the drive gear 142 to the proximal drive gears 136, a second drive gear 44 'and a second drive shaft 42'. As can also be seen in FIG. 8-12, sensors 152 and 154 can be used to detect the position of the transfer carriage 62ʺ, which will be further described in detail below. For example, the sensors 152 and 154 may be implemented as Hall sensors 7028, described below with reference to FIG. 61, 63, 64.

In FIG. 13-16, another form of a surgical instrument 310 with a drive is presented, which may be identical to the surgical instrument 10, except for the differences below. The components of the surgical instrument 310, such as the components of the above-described surgical instrument 10, will be indicated by the same numbers. In this design, the first and second drive systems 20, 40 are driven by the engine 80 through a unique and new “shifting” transmission assembly 360. The first drive system 20 includes a first drive shaft 22, which has a first drive pulley 324, mounted on it with a key or otherwise without rotation. Similarly, the second drive system 40 includes a second drive shaft 42 which has a second drive pulley 344 secured to it with a key or otherwise without rotation. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. 14, the axis of the first FDA drive shaft is offset and parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the second SDA drive shaft.

As shown in FIG. 13-16, in one form, the engine 80 includes a first engine pulley 382, mounted rotatably with the motor shaft 80. The first engine pulley 382 drives the first drive belt 385, which is received on the first drive pulley 324. In addition, the second the engine pulley 384 is mounted without the possibility of rotation to the motor shaft and functionally holds the second drive belt 387. The second drive belt 387 is also adopted on the second drive pulley 344 on the second drive shaft 42. The first and second drive belts 385, 387 m They can be, for example, V-belts.

Tool 310 also includes a transmission assembly 360 comprising a transmission carriage 362 mounted axially within the tool body. Transmission carriage 362 is operatively engaged with an intermediate carriage 374 held laterally in response to contact with the transmission carriage 362 during axial movement of the transmission carriage 362 through the biasing solenoid 71. The auxiliary carriage 374 includes a first auxiliary pulley 375 and a second auxiliary pulley 376 installed on it. In the shown embodiment, the spring 72 biases the transfer carriage 362 in the distal direction "DD" to the first drive position, in which the transfer carriage 362 causes the auxiliary carriage 374 to move to the first lateral position "FLD", and this leads to the first auxiliary pulley 375 removes the slack of the first drive belt 385. In this position, the second auxiliary pulley 376 is placed outside the interaction with the second drive belt 387. Therefore, the operation of the engine 80 will cause the rotation of the lane output drive shaft 22. Although the second engine pulley 384 will also rotate when the engine 80 is activated, the slack of the second drive belt 387 prevents this rotational movement from being transmitted to the second drive pulley 344. Thus, the rotational movement will not be transmitted to the second drive system 40. As described above, the bias solenoid 71 can be activated by the trigger hook 90. However, in alternative designs, the bias solenoid 71 can also be replaced by a manually activated pull unit, for example, as described e type. In the present embodiment, activation of the trigger 90 causes the biasing solenoid 71 to pull the transfer carriage 362 in the proximal direction “PD”, thereby shifting the auxiliary carriage 374 laterally in the second lateral direction “SLD” and bringing the second auxiliary pulley 376 into contact with the second drive belt 387 to eliminate its weaknesses. This lateral movement of the auxiliary carriage 374 also moves the first auxiliary pulley 375 beyond the interaction with the first drive belt 385, allowing the first drive belt 385 to be loosened. Therefore, in this second drive position, activating the engine 80 activates the second drive system 40. The slack of the first drive belt 385 prevents the transmission of rotational movement to the first drive system 20.

Transmission assembly 360 may provide a number of obvious advantages. For example, the use of V-shaped belts eliminates the need for interlocking gears and gear alignment by the clutch mechanism. Moreover, such a transmission design can be activated and deactivated under load. In addition, a slight displacement is required to release interaction and interaction with the transmission assembly 360.

In FIG. 17-21, another form of a surgical instrument 410 with a drive is shown, which may be identical to the surgical instrument 10, except for the differences below. The components of the surgical instrument 410, the same as the components of the above-described surgical instrument 10, will be indicated by the same numbers. In this design, the first and second drive systems 20, 40 are driven by the engine 480 through a unique and new “shifting” transmission unit 460. The first drive system 20 includes a first drive shaft 22, which has a first drive pulley 424, mounted on it with a key or otherwise without rotation. Similarly, the second drive system 40 includes a second drive shaft 42, which has a second drive pulley 444, mounted on it with a key or otherwise without rotation. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. 18, the axis of the first FDA drive shaft is offset and parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the second SDA drive shaft.

As shown in FIG. 19, in one form, the engine 480 includes a slotted drive shaft 481 configured to retractably engage with a transmission shaft assembly 490 configured to interact with a transmission carriage 462 such that axial movement of the transmission carriage 462 causes axial movement of the transmission shaft assembly 490 on a splined drive shaft 481. As can be seen in FIG. 19, inside the assembly of the transmission shaft 490 there is a slotted channel 491 for retractable and functional receipt of a slotted drive shaft 481 therein. In addition, at the distal end of the assembly of the transmission shaft 490, a distal connecting ring 492 is formed. The distal connecting ring 492 is made with an annular groove 493, which configured to receive therein two opposing forks pins 465 attached to the fork portion 464 of the transfer carriage 462. This design serves to connect the transfer carriage 462 with evil gear shaft 490, with the possibility for the node of the transmission shaft 490 to rotate relative to the transfer carriage 462.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first engine pulley 482 is designed to selectively drive the drive shaft assembly 490. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. 19, the transmission shaft assembly 490 has a support ring 494 formed at its proximal end, the size of which allows it to be slidably and rotatably received in the channel 483 of the first engine pulley 482. In addition, the first engine pulley 482 also includes a star-shaped proximal drive cavity 488 configured to engage with a complementary shaped drive portion 495 formed on the transmission shaft assembly 490. The first engine pulley 482 drives the first drive belt 485, which also adopted on the first drive pulley 424. The surgical instrument 410 also includes a second engine pulley 484 having a star-shaped channel 489 configured to be gear interaction with the input into it the driving part 495 of the transmission shaft assembly 490. The second pulley 484 of the engine operatively retained second drive belt 487, which is also received in the second drive pulley 444.

As indicated above, the tool 410 also includes a transmission unit 460 including a transmission carriage 462 held axially within the tool body. The transmission carriage 462 cooperates functionally with the transmission shaft assembly 490, while also moving the transmission shaft assembly 490 along the axis, while the transmission shaft assembly 490 remains in interaction with the engine shaft 481. In FIG. 20 shows a shift solenoid 71 in an inactive position. As can be seen in this FIG., The transmission carriage 462 has moved the transmission shaft assembly 490 to the extreme proximal position, which may also be called the “first drive position”, in which the drive part 495 is in drive interaction with the star channel 488 in the first engine pulley 482. Thus, rotation of the engine shaft 481 will result in rotation of the transmission shaft assembly 490 and the first engine pulley 482. Rotation of the first engine pulley 482 will cause the first drive belt 485 to rotate, which will ultimately lead to the rotation of the first drive shaft 22. When the transmission shaft assembly 490 is in the first drive position, the transmission shaft assembly 490 rotates freely relative to the second engine pulley 484. Therefore, when the first drive system 20 is activated, the second drive system 40 remains inactive. When activating the shifting solenoid 71 with the transition to the position shown in FIG. 21 (by activating the trigger 90), the transmission carriage 462 moves the transmission shaft assembly 490 to the extreme distal position on the motor shaft 481, which may also be called the “second drive position”. As seen in FIG. 21, when the transmission shaft assembly 490 transitions to the second drive position, its drive portion 495 engages in gearing with a star channel 489 in the second engine pulley 484. Therefore, rotation of the engine shaft 481 will cause the rotation of the second engine pulley 484. Rotating the second engine pulley 484 will rotate the second drive belt 487, which will rotate the second drive shaft 42. In this second drive position, the transmission shaft assembly 490 rotates freely within the first engine pulley 482. Therefore, when the second drive system 40 is activated, the first drive system 20 will be inactive.

In FIG. 22-27 show another engine, a transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems that can be used with the various surgical instruments described herein. The design shown includes an engine 580 having an engine shaft 581. See Fig. 23 and 24. The drive gear 582 of the engine or the “central gear” 582 is fixed without rotation to the shaft 581 of the engine for rotation with it. The design further includes a 570 planetary gear assembly including three planetary gears 572 rotatably held between the distal bearing bracket 573 and the proximal bearing bracket 574. The proximal bearing bracket 574 is held on the sleeve portion of the central gear 582, so that the central gear 582 can be rotated relative to the proximal bearing bracket 574. The distal bearing bracket 573 is connected to the second drive shaft 542 of the second drive system 40 so Braz, that the rotation of the distal support arm 573 will result in rotation of second drive shaft 542 of the second drive system 40. The three planetary gears 572 are held in meshing interaction with the node 575 of the ring gear. More specifically, planetary gears 572 are in gear engagement with the inner ring gear 576 of the ring gear assembly 575. The ring gear assembly 575 further includes an external ring gear 577 in gear engagement with a first drive gear 524 connected to a first drive shaft 522 of the first drive system 20. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. 24, the axis of the first FDA drive shaft is offset and parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the second SDA drive shaft.

As seen in FIG. 23, the structure further includes a solenoid 71, with which it can be actuated by a trigger hook in various ways described herein. In this design, the transmission assembly 560 is attached to the shaft 73 of the solenoid 71. In FIG. 24 shows a transmission assembly 560 in a first drive position. In one form, the transmission unit 560 includes a blocking unit, generally designated 590, which includes a first or proximal fixation thickening portion 592 and a second or distal fixation thickening portion 594 on the transmission node 560. As can be seen in this FIG., The transmission unit 560 is positioned so that the proximal fixing thickening portion 592 is in communication with the proximal bearing bracket 574. In this first driving position, the proximal locking thickening portion 592 prevents rotation of the planetary gear assembly 570 as a unit with the central gear 582. However, the rotation of the central gear 582 leads to the rotation of the planetary gear 572. The rotation of the planetary gear 572 leads to the rotation of the ring gear assembly 575. Rotation of the ring gear assembly 575 rotates the first drive gear 524 and the first drive shaft 522. Since rotation of the proximal support bracket 574 is prevented, rotation of the distal support bracket 573 is also prevented. Therefore, rotation of the second drive shaft 544 is also prevented, while the first drive shaft 522 is rotated. A spring (not shown) can be used to bias the solenoid 71 (and the transmission assembly 560 attached to it) to this “first drive position”. When the doctor wishes to activate the second drive system 40, it is possible to activate the solenoid 71 by means of a trigger, as described above, and move the shaft 73 of the solenoid to the position shown in FIG. 25. When the transmission unit 560 is in this “second starting position”, the distal portion 594 of the locking thickening enters into retaining interaction with the ring gear unit 575, and rotation is prevented. Thus, when the central gear 582 is rotated, the planetary gear holder (i.e., the distal bearing bracket 573 and the proximal bearing bracket 574) will also rotate. Planetary gears 572 will rotate within the fixed inner ring gear 576. Such rotational movement will be transmitted to the second drive shaft 542, while the first drive shaft 522 will remain inactive.

In FIG. 28 shows another form of a surgical instrument 610 with a drive, which may be identical to the surgical instrument 10, except for the differences below. The components of the surgical instrument 610, the same as the components of the above-described surgical instrument 10, will be indicated by the same numbers. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. 28, the axis of the first FDA drive shaft is offset and parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the second SDA drive shaft. Such a construction comprises an engine 680, which has two independently activated motor shafts 681, 683. The engine 680 can be controlled by the various types of trigger construction described herein, so that activating the trigger in one way causes the engine 680 to rotate the first shaft 681 of the engine, and activating the trigger in another way causes the engine 680 to rotate the second shaft 683 of the engine. In this design, the first engine gear 682 is mounted on the first engine shaft 681 and is held in gear interaction with the intermediate gear 646. The intermediate gear 646 is functionally held in gear interaction with the first drive gear 624 mounted on the first drive shaft 622 of the first drive system 620. Therefore, the activation of the first engine shaft 681 will lead to the activation of the first drive system 620. Similarly, the second engine gear 684 is mounted on the second engine shaft 683 and held in gear interaction with a second drive gear 644 mounted on the second drive shaft 642 of the second drive system 640. For this reason, activation of the second motor shaft 683 will lead to the activation of the second drive system 640.

In FIG. 29 shows another form of a surgical instrument 710 with a drive, which may be identical to the surgical instrument 10, except for the differences below. The components of the surgical instrument 710, the same as the components of the above-described surgical instrument 10, will be indicated by the same numbers. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. 29, the axis of the first FDA drive shaft is offset and parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the second SDA drive shaft. In this design, the first and second drive systems 720, 740 are driven by the engine 780 through a unique and new “switchable” transmission assembly 760. The first drive system 720 includes a first drive shaft 722, which has a first drive gear 724, mounted on it with a key or otherwise without rotation. Similarly, the second drive system 740 includes a second drive shaft 742, which has a second drive gear 744, mounted on it with a key or otherwise without rotation. The engine 780 includes an engine gear 782 that is rotatably attached to the shaft 781 of the engine 780.

In the illustrated embodiment, the second engine 750 is used to shift the transmission assembly 760, as will be further described in detail below. The second engine 750 may be controlled, for example, by the various trigger designs and switches described herein. The second engine 750 may be controlled in a manner similar to the control of the engine 7038, as described below in more detail with reference to FIG. 61, 63, 64. As can be seen in FIG. 29, the first transmission pulley 753 is connected by a key or otherwise attached without rotation to the motor shaft 752. The first rotary shaft 754 is rotatably mounted inside the housing 12 of the handle 14. The first rotary shaft forms the axis of rotation "PA". The second transmission pulley 755 is mounted rotatably on the first rotary shaft 754, and the transmission belt 756 is mounted on the first and second transmission pulleys 753, 755. In one form, the movable transmission assembly 760 includes a transmission rod 762 attached to the first rotary shaft 754. In addition, an auxiliary shaft 763 is attached to the transmission rod 762, on which the intermediate gear 764 is functionally mounted. The movable transmission unit 760 is movable between the first drive position and the second drive position. To move the shifted transmission assembly 760 to the first drive position, the doctor activates the second engine 750 to rotate the rotary shaft 763 and the intermediate gear 764 around the axis of rotation PA, so that it engages in gear interaction with the engine gear 782 and the first drive gear 724. In this position, activation motor 780 will activate the first drive system 720. When the doctor wishes to activate the second drive system 740, he activates the second engine 750 to rotate the idler gear 764 around the axis of rotation PA with conducting in toothed engagement with the motor gear 782 and the second driving gear 744. In this position, the activation of the motor 780 results in activation of the second drive system 740. One advantage provided by such a design is the fact that the exact orientation of the gears is not required. When the intermediate gear 764 is deflected to the desired position, it can rotate and automatically find the mating tooth.

In FIG. 30-32, a new unique 800 engine block is presented that can be installed in the enclosures of the types described herein. The engine block 800 may include a separate casing 801 functionally holding the first engine 802 with a first engine shaft 803 that form the first drive system 804. The engine block 800 may include a second engine 805 with a second engine shaft 806 that form a second drive system 807. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. 8, the axis of the first FDA drive shaft is offset and parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the second SDA drive shaft. Block 800 may further include a board assembly 808 with a control circuit that contacts 808A, which is operatively connected to corresponding contacts on a board assembly mounted or otherwise held within the tool body, and communicates with the tool control system. The housing may further include electrical contacts 808B configured to be operatively connected to respective electrical contacts on an end effector coupled thereto.

As shown in FIG. 1, modular surgical system 2 may include various other designs of surgical end effectors 1000, 2000, and 3000 that can be used in combination with various surgical instruments described herein. As will be further described in detail below, each of the end effectors 1000, 2000, 3000 includes two separate “first and second drive end effector systems” configured to be operatively connected to the first and second drive systems of the surgical instrument to receive control displacement. Each drive system of the end effector is arranged to linearly move the corresponding activating components of the end effector from the first or initial linear positions to the second or end linear positions in response to the application of the corresponding rotational movements to the drive systems of the end effector with a surgical instrument to which the end effector is functionally attached. The activating components of the end effector apply linear activating movements to the various components of the end effector located in the instrumental head part of the end effector in order to perform various surgical procedures. As will be further described in detail below, the end effectors employ unique components and systems that assist the physician in connecting the first and second drive shafts of the surgical instrument to the corresponding drive shafts of the end effector. Since the four drive shafts are joined together substantially simultaneously, various connecting structures and controls can be applied so that the shafts are in the correct positions or “approximately right positions”, which will facilitate such a simultaneous connection of the drive systems.

As shown in FIG. 33, one form of mechanical coupling system 50 can be used to facilitate the simultaneous detachable and functional connection of two drive systems in a surgical instrument with corresponding “driven” shafts in the end effectors. Coupling system 50 may include pin connectors that can be attached to drive shafts in a surgical instrument, and corresponding female connectors attached to driven shafts in a surgical end effector. For example, in FIG. 9 shows pin connectors 51 attached to the first and second drive shafts 22, 42 by means of clamping screws 52. Referring again to FIG. 33, each of the pin connectors 51 is configured to receive, with transmission, drive forces in respective socket connectors 57, which can also be attached to the drive shafts inside the end effector. In one form, each pin connector 51 includes at least three drive ribs 53 evenly distributed around a central portion 54 of the pin connector 51. In the embodiment shown, for example, five drive ribs 53 are evenly distributed around a central portion 54. Each drive rib 53 has a pointed distal end 55. Each drive rib 53 can be made with slightly rounded edges 56 to facilitate their insertion into the corresponding grooves 58 of the nests inside the nest carrier 57. Each slot trough 58 has a conical proximal inlet portion 59 to facilitate insertion of a corresponding drive rib 53 into it. The pointed distal end 55 of each drive rib 53 in combination with the tapered inlet 59 of each of the slot troughs 58 will compensate for some misalignment between the pin connector 51 and the corresponding female connector 57 during the connection process. In addition, the rounded edges 57 at the pointed distal end 55 also help the sliding insert of the pin connector 51 into the corresponding socket connector 58.

In one form, at least one of the pin connectors 51 is movably attached to a respective first or second drive shaft of a surgical instrument or a corresponding first or second driven shaft of a surgical end effector. More specifically, the pin connector 51 may be radially or angularly attached to the shaft by a “first predetermined radial movement” on the shaft. This can be realized, for example, by means of a design with a key and a keyway, the size of which relative to each other contributes to a certain amount of radial or angular movement of the pin connector 51 along the shaft. In other words, for example, a key can be formed on the shaft or otherwise mounted on it, the size of which is smaller than the corresponding keyway formed in the pin connector 51 so that the key can move inside the keyway and set the first preset radial advance value. This first predetermined amount of radial advancement is preferably sufficient to move the connector backward or forward. For a pin connector 51 with five ribs 53, for example, a first predetermined radial advance value may be, for example, 5-37 degrees. Embodiments may exist in which the first predetermined range of radial advancement may be less than 5 °, and preferably, for example, not more than 4 °. Such a range of radial or angular advancement may be sufficient if, for example, the corresponding female connector 57 is rigidly fixed to the corresponding drive shaft and otherwise is not capable of any radial advancement. However, if both the pin and female connectors are capable of radial or angular advancement, this range can be reduced by 50%, providing each connector (pin and corresponding female connector) with a range of advancement of approximately 3-16 degrees. The amount of radial or angular advancement by which the female connector 57 can move on the corresponding shaft may be referred to herein as “the second predetermined amount of radial advancement”. Socket connectors 57 can also be attached to respective drive shafts with a key and keyway design as described above, which provides the desired second predetermined amount of radial advancement. Embodiments may exist in which the second predetermined range of radial advancement may be less than 5 °, and preferably, for example, not more than 4 °.

Various combinations and mounting designs of pin connectors and female connectors are possible. For example, one or both pin connectors can be mounted to move to the respective drive shafts of the surgical instrument (or the driven shafts of the surgical end effector) in various ways described herein. Similarly, one or both of the female connectors can be mounted to move to the corresponding slaves. end effector shafts (or surgical instrument drive shafts) in various manners described herein. For example, on one of the first and second drive shafts, the pin connector may be movably mounted. Another pin connector, attached to another drive shaft, can be mounted on it without the possibility of movement. The female connector on the driven shaft, which corresponds to the movably mounted pin connector, can be attached to the driven shaft without the possibility of movement, and the female connector mounted on another driven shaft and corresponding to the connector fixed without the possibility of movement can be mounted on the driven shaft. Thus, one of the pin and female connectors of the "connecting pair" is made with the possibility of movement. The term "connecting pair" means a pin connector and a corresponding female connector, which are configured to be connected together for the purpose of functional connection of the surgical shaft of the surgical instrument with the corresponding driven shaft of the end effector. In other designs, both the pin coupler and the female coupler of the connecting pair may be movably coupled to respective shafts.

Such a design of the connectors serves, for example, to create a small angular margin between the connecting components, so that the components can be rotated a little for sufficient alignment, which allows you to simultaneously align the connecting components attached to two separate rotary drive mechanisms. In addition, there may be sufficient lateral clearance or margin in the drive mechanisms to facilitate the joining process. Such a lateral clearance or margin can be realized by forming keys and keyways in the gears, connectors and / or mating shafts in order to facilitate the possibility of such a small rotation of the components. In addition, in relation to various movable transmission assemblies, a switching structure can be applied that can activate the engine and cause a slight rotation of the drive shafts for the purpose of connection.

This and other control methods can be applied in order to ensure that the drive shafts in the surgical instruments are in the desired positions, which facilitates their connection with the corresponding drive shafts in the end effectors. This unique new mechanical coupling system 50 serves to provide additional flexibility in the coupling process, allowing the drive shafts to be connected when there is some misalignment between the respective shafts. It should be understood that although the various embodiments described herein show pin connectors 51 attached to drive shafts inside a surgical instrument and socket connectors 58 attached to drive shafts of an end effector, pin connectors 51 can be attached to drive shafts of an end effector, and socket connectors 58 can be attached to the drive shafts of the tool.

In FIG. 34-37 illustrates a surgical end effector 1000 comprising a surgical cutting and stapling instrument of the type commonly referred to as an “open linear” stapling instrument. Various forms of such open linear staplers are described, for example, in US Pat. No. 5,415,334, entitled “SURGICAL BINDING TOOL AND BRACKET TAPES”, and in US Pat. . The end effector 1000 comprises an end effector body 1010, which may be made of body segments 1012, 1014 connected together with removable screws, clamps, latches, and the like. From the end effector body 1010, the lower jaw 1020 and the upper jaw 1040 protrude, which together can form the tool head 1004 of the end effector. The lower jaw 1020 comprises a lower jaw frame 1022 configured to functionally hold the cassette 1060 with surgical staples within it. Such surgical staple cassettes are well known to those skilled in the art and, therefore, will not be described in detail herein. Briefly, a cassette with surgical brackets 1060 may include a cassette body 1062 in which rows of slots 1066 for brackets are made on the sides of a longitudinal groove 1068 located in the center of the cassette 1062 housing. A groove 1068 is configured to allow longitudinal movement of the cutting element 1090 along , as will be further described in detail below. A surgical staple or staples (not shown) are held in the slots 1066 for staples on the push-out staples (not shown), which are arranged to move upward within the corresponding socket 1066 during start-up. The cassette 1060 with brackets can be configured to remove the lower jaw from the frame 1022 and replace it with another, unused cartridge, making reusable the end effector 1000. However, the end effector 1000 can also be designed for one-time use.

As shown in FIG. 36, the lower jaw frame 1022 may be made of metallic material and have a U-shaped distal portion 1024 configured to receive a cassette 1060 with surgical staples. The side walls 1026 of the U-shaped distal portion 1024 may have a distal end 1028 configured to release and retain interaction with a portion of the surgical staple cassette 1060. The cassette case 1062 with brackets may also have interaction elements 1064 configured to detachably engage with protruding portions 1030 of the wall of the lower jaw frame 1022. The end effector 1000 further comprises an upper jaw 1040 including a stop portion 1042. The stop portion 1042 may include a lower side (not shown) with a plurality of recesses for forming brackets thereon. The upper jaw 1040 further includes a proximal portion of the housing 1044 having a distal pin 1046 of the pivoting mechanism passing through it. The ends of the distal pivot pin 1046 laterally protruding laterally from the proximal end of the proximal body portion 1044 are rotatably rotated in the holes 1032 of the pivoting mechanism in the lower jaw 1020. The pivot pin 1046 forms an AA-AA attachment axis around which the proximal end of the upper jaw 1040 rotates relative to the lower jaw 1020 so that the stop portion 1042 is movable between an open position spaced from the cassette 1060 with brackets installed in the lower jaw 1020 and open position adjacent to the cassette 1060 with brackets and / or fabric located between them. The end effector 1000 may further include a transverse axis of rotation 1050 included in pockets 1034 formed in the protruding walls 1030 of the lower jaw 1020, and mounted inside the holes 1016 in parts of the housing 1012, 1014. The axis of rotation 1050 may serve as the axis of rotation or the surface around which rotates the stop portion 1042.

The movement of the stop portion 1042 between the open and closed positions is controlled by the first end effector drive system, also referred to as the end effector closure system 1070 here. In one embodiment, for example, the end effector end closure system 1070 includes a shuttle shuttle 1070 that extends around the proximal portion of the lower body 1024 jaws 1020. Shuttle shuttle 1072 may also be referred to as the “first end effector actuator”. Shuttle shuttle 1072 may include a U-shaped portion including distal protruding walls 1074 and proximal protruding walls 1076. Each distal protruding wall 1074 includes an arcuate curved groove 1078 configured to receive a corresponding portion of a pin of curved section 1048 attached to the upper jaw 1040. Thus, the axial or linear movement of the shuttle 1072 relative to the lower jaw 1020 causes the rotation of the upper jaw 1040 on the pivot axis 1050 and around the axis cr AA-AA captive by reacting pin curvilinear section 1048 in the slots 1078 of curved.

In various embodiments, the closure system 1070 includes a threaded end effector closing barrel 1080 with a threaded end and a distal end portion 1082 that is rotatably held inside the end effector body 1010. The end effector closure barrel 1080 forms the axis of the CSA-CSA closure trunk. See FIG. 37. A female connector 57 is attached to the proximal end of the closure barrel 1080 to facilitate coupling of the closure barrel 1080 to the pin connector 51 attached to the first drive shaft in the surgical instrument. The closure system 1070 further includes a closure nut 1084 threaded onto the closure barrel 1080. The closure nut 1084 is configured to be installed in the mounting grooves 1077 in the protruding walls 1076 of the closure shuttle 1072. Thus, turning the closure barrel 1080 in the first direction forces the closure nut 1084 push the shuttle closing 1072 in the distal direction DD. Moving the shuttle shuttle 1072 in the distal direction DD causes the articulated movement of the upper jaw 1040 from the open to the closed position. Similarly, moving the shuttle shuttle 1084 in the proximal direction PD will move the upper jaw 1040 from the closed position back to the open.

The end effector 1000 further includes a second end effector drive system, also referred to herein as the trigger system 1100 for moving the tissue-cutting member 1090 and the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 between the start and end positions. When the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 is distally pushed through the surgical staple cartridge 1060, the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 is operatively interacted with the ejectors in the cassette 1060 on which the surgical braces are held. As the distal pushing takes place, the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 pushers move upward in respective recesses to push the brackets held there into forming interaction with the lower side of the stop portion 1042 of the upper jaw 1040. In one embodiment, the trigger system 1100 further includes a threaded trigger barrel 1102, rotatably held on the body of the end effector 1010. The launch barrel 1102 defines an axis of the launch barrel FSA-FSA parallel to or substantially parallel to the axis of the CS closing barrel A-csa. See, for example, FIG. 37. The launch barrel 1102 includes a distal end portion 1104 held rotatably on a mounting block 1106 mounted in the end effector body 1010. A female connector 57 is attached to the proximal end of the trigger shaft 1102 to facilitate coupling of the trigger barrel 1102 with a pin connector 51 attached to the second drive shaft in the surgical instrument. The trigger system 1100 further includes a trigger nut 1110 threaded onto the trigger barrel 1102. Thus, turning the trigger barrel 1102 causes axial movement of the trigger nut 1110 in the body of the end effector 1010. In one embodiment, the cutting fabric element 1090 and the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 connected to the starter nut 1110 by the trigger bar or trigger rods 1112. The trigger bar or rods may also be referred to herein as the “second end effector actuator” linearly or along the axis still in response to activation of the launch system. Thus, turning the trigger barrel 1102 in the first direction will push the trigger nut 1110, the trigger rod (s) 1112, the cutting fabric element 1090, and the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 in the distal direction DD from, for example, the initial position (FIG. 35) to the end position, in which the tissue cutting element 1090 and the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 are pushed to the distal end of the cassette with surgical brackets 1060. Turning the trigger barrel 1102 in the opposite direction will push the trigger nut 1110, the trigger rod (s) 1112, the cutting tissue ele the cop 1090 and the knot of the wedge-shaped slide 1092 in the proximal direction PD from their respective end positions back to their respective initial positions. In some embodiments, the wedge-shaped slide assembly may remain at the distal end of the surgical staple cassette and not return with the tissue cutting member 1090 to its initial position. In other embodiments, the tissue cutting element and the wedge-shaped slide assembly element may remain at the distal end of the staple cartridge element.

The end effector 1000 may also be equipped with various sensors connected to the end effector contact plate 1120 mounted in the end effector body 1010. The contact plate 1120 may be located in the end effector case 1020 so that when the end effector 1000 is operatively connected to the surgical instrument, the end effector contact plate 1120 is electrically connected to the surgical instrument contact plate 30 mounted in the surgical instrument body 12. See, for example, FIG. 1. As shown in FIG. 34., the closure sensor 1122 can be mounted in the body of the end effector 1010 and electrically connected to the contact plate of the end effector 1120 so that when the end effector 1000 is operatively connected to the surgical instrument, the closure sensor 1122 communicates with the control system of the surgical instrument. The closure sensor 1122 may include a Hall sensor 7028, as shown below, for example, in connection with FIG. 61, 63 configured to detect the position of the protrusion of the switch 1086 on the lock nut 1084. In addition, the trigger sensor 1124 may also be mounted in the end effector body 1010 to detect the presence of a trigger rod 1112. The trigger sensor 1112 may include a Hall sensor 7028, as shown below, for example, in connection with FIG. 61, 63 and to be electrically connected to the contact plate of the end effector 1120 for ultimate communication with a surgical instrument control system, such as a handle processor 7024, described in more detail below in connection with FIG. 61, 63, 64.

The following describes the use of the end effector 1000 in conjunction with a surgical instrument 10. However, it should be understood that the end effector 1000 can be operatively connected to various other surgical instrument designs described herein. Before use, the closing barrel 1080 and the launching barrel 1102 are “locked” or located in their respective initial positions to facilitate attachment to the first and second drive shafts 22, 42, respectively. For example, to connect the end effector 1000 to the surgical instrument 10, the doctor moves the end effector 1000 to a position where the axis of the CA-CA closure shaft is aligned with the axis of the first FDA-FDA drive shaft and the axis of the FSA-FSA trigger shaft is aligned with the axis of the second drive shaft SDA-SDA. The female connector 57 on the closure barrel 1080 engages with the pin connector 51 on the first drive shaft 22. Similarly, the female connector 57 on the trigger barrel 1102 interacts with the pin connector 51 on the second drive shaft 42. Thus, being in this position, the closing barrel 1080 is operatively connected to the first drive shaft 22, and the launch barrel 1102 is operatively connected to the second drive shaft 42. The contact plate 1120 of the end effector is functionally oedinena with the contact plate 30 of the surgical instrument so that the sensors 1122, 1124 (and any other sensors within the end effector 1000) are in operative communication with the surgical instrument control system. To keep the end effector 1000 in coupled functional interaction with the surgical instrument 10, the end effector 1000 includes a stopper latch 1130 attached to the end effector body 1010 and configured to detachably engage with a portion of the tool body 12. The latch 1130 of the limiter may include a holding protrusion 1132, which can detachably interact with the cavity 15 of the limiter formed in the housing 12. See. one.

When connected together, the closure sensor 1122 detects the position of the closure nut 1084, and the trigger 1124 detects the position of the trigger rod 1112. This information is sent to the surgical instrument control system. In addition, the doctor can confirm that the shiftable transmission unit (or its transmission carriage 62) is in the first drive position. This can be confirmed by the activation of the indicator light 77 on the housing 12, as described above. If the shiftable transmission assembly 60 is not in its first drive position, the doctor can activate the trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to the first drive position so that the activation of the swing switch 110 to activate the engine 80 will activate the first drive system 20. If the closing system 1070 and the starting system 1100 are in their respective initial positions, and the unspent cartridge with clips 1060 is correctly installed in the end effector 1000, the doctor may arrange anshi 1020, 1040 relative to the target tissue to be cut and stapled. The doctor can close the upper jaw 1040 by activating the start switch-swing 110 to turn on the engine 80 and rotate the first drive shaft 22. After the target tissue is sandwiched between the upper jaw 1040 and the cassette 1060 with surgical staples in the lower jaw 1020, the doctor can activate the trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to its second drive position so that the activation of the engine 80 will rotate the second drive shaft 42. When the transmission carriage 62 is moved to the second drive position, the doctor may again activate the trigger switch-swing 110 to activate the second drive system 40 and so that the trigger system 1100 in the end effector 1000 pushed the cutting fabric element 1090 and the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 distally through the cassette 1060 with surgical staples. Since the tissue cutting element 1090 and the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 are distally extruded, the target tissue sandwiched between the jaws 1020, 1040 is cut and stapled. After the tissue cutting element 1090 and the wedge-shaped slide assembly 1092 are pushed to their extreme distal positions in the surgical cassette 1060, the doctor can activate the start switch-swing 110 to reverse the direction of rotation of the engine and return the start system 1100 to its initial position .

When using the end effector 1000 and other end effector and surgical instruments described herein and having similar jaw designs, it may be difficult to properly clean the recesses of the stop on its underside. In addition, the recesses of the emphasis can wear, grind, or simply wear out over time, becoming unsuitable for further use. In addition, depending on the application, loading and removing the cassette with surgical staples can be difficult. In FIG. 119-121 depicts a “set of brackets” of a single use 1300, which can solve some or even all of these problems.

In FIG. 119 shows a portion of the end effector 1000 ', which may be similar in design and use to, for example, the end effector 1000, as well as the other end effectors disclosed herein, except for the specific differences described below. As represented in FIG. 119, the upper jaw 1240 includes an open distal end 1243. The upper jaw 1240 can be made of metal material and have a U-shape when viewed from the distal end, and include two protruding inward and opposite each other holding protrusions 1245. End the effector 1000 ′ further includes a lower jaw frame 1222 similar to, for example, the lower jaw frame 1222 described herein. As shown in FIG., the lower jaw frame 1222 also has an open distal end 1223.

Also according to FIG. 119, one embodiment of a single use bracket kit 1300 includes an abutment 1302 having a surface for forming the clips 1304, including a plurality of recesses formed therein for forming the clips (not shown). The bracket kit 1300 further includes a cartridge 1310 with brackets having a cartridge platform 1312 located opposite the bottom surface to form the brackets 1304 of the stop 1302. The cartridge 1310 with brackets may be similar to other bracket cassettes described in more detail herein and may functionally hold a lot of surgical staples. The bracket kit 1300 further includes a disposable storage member 1320 having a size and shape suitable for frictional engagement with an abutment 1302 and a cassette 1310 with staples so as to maintain alignment between the recesses for the staples in the lower surface to form the staples 1304 and staples ( not shown) in cartridge 1310 with staples before use. The holding member 1320 may also include a spacer 1322 extending between the stop 1302 and the cassette 1310 with brackets. The retaining element may, for example, be molded from plastic or other suitable polymeric material, and the release liner 1322 may be made of metal. The separation pad 1322 may be held by friction in a groove or other holding member formed in the holding member 1320.

As shown in FIG. 120, a set of brackets 1300 is installed by aligning the stop 1302 with the open distal end 1243 in the upper jaw 1240, and the cassette 1310 with brackets is aligned with the open distal end 1245 on the frame of the lower jaw 1222. After that, the set of brackets 1300 is moved in the proximal direction PD to the position shown in FIG. 120. The holding protrusions 1245 serve to hold the stop 1302 in the upper jaw 1240. The end effector 1000 'may also include a manually activated latch element 1340, which can be moved from the non-locked position (FIG. 119) to the locked position (FIG. 121). For example, in the locked position, the latch element 1340 holds the stop 1302 in the upper jaw 1240, and the cassette 1310 with brackets in the frame of the lower jaw 1222. For example, the latch element 1340 may include a removable latch upper arm 1342, which is detachable interacting with a portion (for example, a protrusion, stopper, collar or other holding element or elements) formed at the proximal end of the stop 1302. Likewise, the latch element 1340 may include eremescheniya lower latch shoulder 1344 adapted to detachably interaction with a portion (e.g., projection, stop, collar or other retaining element or elements) formed on the cassette 1310 with staples. The upper and lower latch arms 1342, 1344 can pivotally or otherwise be held movably on the end effector 1000 ′ to selectively move between the locked and unlocked positions. In various embodiments, the upper and lower latch arms 1342, 1344 can typically be biased to a locked position by springs or springs (not shown). In such designs, the physician may insert a set of staples 1300 into the upper jaw 1240 and the frame of the lower jaw 1222. When the proximal end of the stop 1302 contacts the upper latch shoulder 1342, the upper latch shoulder 1342 rotates or moves to allow the stop 1302 to be replaced. Once the stop is in place, the upper shoulder 1342 of the latch is shifted into the locking interaction with the stop 1302 (in the case of a spring or biasing element). In alternative designs, the upper latch arm 1342 can be moved to a locked position manually. Similarly, when the proximal end of the cassette 1310 contacts the brackets with the lower latch arm 1344, the lower latch arm 1344 rotates or moves to allow the cassette 1310 to snap into place. As soon as the cassette 1310 with the brackets snaps into place, the lower latch shoulder 1344 is displaced into the locking interaction with the cassette 1310 with the brackets to hold it in place (in the case of a spring or bias structure). In alternative embodiments, the lower latch arm 1344 can be moved to a locked position manually. After installing the set of brackets 1300 and fixing or otherwise attaching the stop 1302 and the cartridge 1310 with brackets to the end effector 1000 ', the doctor can remove the storage member 1320. See, for example, FIG. 121. After using the set of brackets 1300, the doctor can install the retaining element 1320 in place at the distal ends of the stop 1302 and cassettes 1310 with brackets. This can be done by aligning the open end of the holding member 1320 and then pushing the holding member 1320 back into friction interaction with the stop 1302 and the cassette 1310 with brackets. After installing the distal ends of the stop 1302 and the cassette 1310 with brackets in the retaining element 1320, the doctor can move the upper and lower latch arms 1342, 1344 of the latch into their unlocked positions to be able to remove the set of 1300 staples from the upper jaw 1240 and the lower jaw frame 1222. After that, a set of 1300 staples can be disposed of as a single unit. In other situations, the physician may separately remove the stop 1302 and cassette 1310 with brackets from the end effector 1000 'without first installing the retaining element 1320.

In FIG. 38-41 present a surgical end effector 2000 comprising a surgical cutting and stapling instrument. It refers to a type of tool, commonly called a “curved cutting-squeezing tool”. Various embodiments of such crosslinking devices are described, for example, in US Pat. No. 6,988,650, entitled MECHANISM FOR PROMOTING THE LEVER OF THE RETAINING PIN for the BENT CUTTING-BINDING TOOL, and US Patent No. 7,134,587, REMAINING REMAIN in full by reference. The end effector 2000 comprises a body of the end effector 2010, which can be made of segments 2012, 2014 of the housing, interconnected with the possibility of extraction using screws, bulges, snap elements, etc. From the case of the end effector 2010, an elongated frame assembly 2020 protrudes, interrupted at the end effector tool head 2002. In one embodiment, the frame assembly 2020 comprises a pair of spatially spaced frame spacers or plates 2022 that are stably attached to the housing 2010 and protrude distally from it. A C-shaped support structure 2024 is attached to the distal end of the frame plates 2022. The term "C-shaped" is used throughout the description to indicate the concave shape of the support structure 2024 and the cassette module with surgical staples 2060. The C-shaped structure contributes to improved functionality, and the term "C-shaped" in this description should be understood as including many concave shapes that likewise enhance the functionality of surgical stapling and cutting tools. The supporting structure 2024 is attached to the frame plates 2022 with a rivet 2023 of the shoulder and the trunks 2026 that extend from the supporting structure 2024 into the corresponding holes for receiving them in the frame plates 2022. In various embodiments, the support structure 2024 may be formed in one piece. More specifically, the support structure 2024 may be formed of extruded aluminum material. When forming the supporting structure 2024 in this way, the use of multiple parts is not required, and the associated manufacturing and assembly costs are significantly reduced. In addition, it is believed that the unitary structure of the support structure 2024 improves the overall stability of the end effector 2000. In addition, the unitary extruded structure of the support structure 2024 provides weight reduction, facilitates sterilization, since irradiation with a cobalt source provides effective penetration through extruded aluminum, as well as reducing tissue injury. thanks to a smoother outer surface achieved by extrusion.

The end effector 2000 further includes a first end effector drive system, also called an end effector closure system 2070, and a second end effector drive system, also referred to herein as a start system 2100. In one embodiment, for example, an end effector closure system 2070 includes a closing bolt assembly 2072 having dimensions necessary for sliding installation between the frame struts 2022 for axial movement between them. The closing bolt assembly 2072 may also be referred to as a first end effector actuator. It has an open lower section, made with the possibility of sliding installation in it of the node 2112 of the launch rod of the launch system 2100, as will be described in more detail below. In one embodiment, for example, the closing bolt assembly 2072 is a molded plastic member having a shape suitable for movements and functions, which will be further described below. The manufacture of a closing bolt assembly 2072 from plastic allows to reduce production costs, as well as to reduce the weight of the end effector 2000. In addition, it is possible to simplify the sterilization of the end effector 2000 by irradiation from a cobalt source, since the radiation penetrates the plastic more easily than through stainless steel. In an alternative embodiment, the closing bolt assembly 2072 may be made of extruded aluminum, followed by machining to produce the elements required in the final construction. Although the design of the extruded aluminum closing bolt assembly may not be as easy to manufacture as the plastic component, it will still provide the same benefits (i.e. removing components, easier assembly, less weight, easier to sterilize).

The closing bolt assembly 2072 includes a curved distal end 2074 having dimensions that allow it to be received between the side walls 2027 of the support structure 2024. The curved distal end 2074 has dimensions and shape that allow it to be received and held in the cartridge case 2062 of the cartridge module 2060. In various embodiments, the proximal end of the closure bolt assembly 2072 is connected to a closure nut 2084 threaded onto the closure barrel 2080. The closure barrel 2080 forms the axis of the CSA-CSA closure shaft and has a female connector 57 connected to its proximal end to facilitate closure of the closure barrel 2080 with a pin connector 51 attached to a first drive shaft of a surgical instrument. Turning the closing barrel 2080 in the first direction causes the closing nut 2084 to push the closing bolt assembly 2072 in the distal direction DD. Turning the closing barrel 2080 in the opposite direction likewise results in a proximal movement of the closing nut 2084 and the closing bolt assembly 2072.

As indicated above, the distal end 2074 of the closing bolt assembly 2072 is configured to functionally hold the cassette body 2062 of the cassette module 2060 therein. Cassette module 2060 includes a plurality of surgical staples (not shown) on a staple ejector (not shown) that, when extended axially, pushes surgical staples out of their respective recesses 2066 located on each side of groove 1068, which is configured to allow element 2115 to pass through it scalpels. The cassette module 2060 may, for example, be somewhat similar to the cassette modules described, for example, in US Pat. Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587, which are incorporated by reference in their entirety, except where noted. The end effector 2000 can be disposed of after a single use, or the end effector 2000 can be used repeatedly by replacing the used cartridge module during the operation or in preparation for a new operation after re-sterilization.

The end effector 2000 further includes a trigger system 2100, including a trigger rod assembly 2112 that is slidably mounted in the open lower portion of the closure bolt assembly 2072. See FIG. 39. In one embodiment, the launch system 2100 further includes a launch barrel 2102, which at the distal end 2104 has a threaded thread and the proximal section 2106 has a square cross section. The threaded distal end 2104 is threadedly screwed into the threaded starting nut 2110 attached to the proximal end of the launch rod assembly 2112. The threaded starter nut 2110 has dimensions that allow it to be slidably received in the axial cavity 2085 of the closure nut assembly 2084. See FIG. 41. This design allows the starter nut 2110 to extend axially with the closure nut assembly 2084 when the end effector 2000 is moved to the closed position, and then move axially with respect to the closure nut 2084 and the closure bolt assembly 2072 when the trigger system 2100 is activated. The trigger barrel 2102 forms the axis of the launch barrel FSA-FSA, parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the barrel CSA-CSA. See, for example, FIG. 41. In FIG. 39 and 41, it can also be seen that the proximal portion 2106 of the trigger shaft 2102 is slidably received in the elongated channel 2105 in the socket connector 57 ', which is otherwise identical to the socket connector described herein. The elongated channel 2105 has a square cross-section, the size of which allows the proximal portion 2106 of the launch barrel 2102 to be slidably mounted therein. This design allows the launch rod 2102 to move axially relative to the female end connector 57 'with possible rotation together with the female end connector 57'. Thus, when the closing bolt assembly 2072 extends in the distal direction “DD” after activating the first drive system in the surgical instrument, the starting nut 2110 will move in the distal direction “DD” in the node of the closing nut 2084. The proximal part 2106 of the launch shaft 2102 will move along axis in the channel 2105 in the female connector 57 ', while remaining in interaction with it. After this, activation of the second drive system in one direction of rotation in a surgical instrument operably connected to the female end connector 57 'will cause the launch barrel 2102 to rotate, causing the launch rod assembly 2112 to move in the distal direction DD. As the trigger assembly 2112 moves in the distal direction, the scalpel holder 2115 extends distally through the cartridge module 2060. The activation of the second drive system in the second direction of rotation leads to the displacement of the launch rod assembly 2112 in the proximal direction “PD”.

The distal end of the trigger rod assembly 2112 includes a drive member 2114 and a scalpel member 2115 distally protruding from it. As seen in FIG. 39, the scalpel member 2115 is slidably taken in the stop portion 2142 of the stop assembly 2140, configured to fit the stop structure of the support structure 2024 in the curved portion 2025. For more information on the stop assembly 2140, see US Pat. Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587. The end effector 2000 may also include a locking safety mechanism 2150 (FIG. 39) to prevent starting of a previously launched cartridge module 2060. A more detailed description of the interaction between the cartridge module 2060 and the safety lock mechanism is given in US Pat. Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587.

The end effector 2000 also includes a tissue retainer pin drive 2160. The fabric locking pin drive mechanism 2160 includes a saddle slider 2162 located in the upper portion of the housing 2010. The slider 2162 is pivotally connected to the pusher rod actuator 2163, which is slidably held inside the housing 2010. The pusher rod actuator 2163 is longitudinally limited along the long axis of the end effector 2000. The pusher rod actuator 2163 is connected to the pusher rod 2164 by an annular groove 2165 on the pusher rod 2164 which snaps into groove 2166 of the pusher rod actuator 2163. See FIG. 41. The distal end of the rod 2164 of the pusher contains an annular groove 2167, which is interconnected with a groove 2172 at the proximal end of the sleeve 2170, which is attached to the cartridge module 2160 (best shown in FIG. 41). The distal end of the sleeve 2170 includes a groove 2174 for engaging with the annular groove 2182 on the holding pin 2180. Manual movement of the slider 2162 leads to the movement of the rod 2164 of the pusher. A distal movement or proximal retraction of the pusher rod 2164 results in a corresponding movement of the holding pin 2180. The activation mechanism 2160 of the holding pin 2180 also interacts functionally with the closing bolt assembly 2072 so that activation of the closing system 2070 leads to automatic distal movement of the holding pin 2180, if it is not already was manually moved to the extreme proximal position. As the retaining pin 2180 advances, it passes through the cassette body 2062 to the stop assembly 2140 to thereby capture tissue between the cartridge module 2060 and the stop assembly 2140.

In one embodiment, the holding pin drive mechanism 2160 includes a pivot pin 2190 that can be pivotally or pivotally held in the housing 2010 by a pivot pin 2192. The closing bolt assembly 2072 further includes rods or protrusions 2073 extending laterally from both sides of the closing assembly 2072 the bolt in the housing 2010. These rods 2073 are slidably received into the corresponding arcuate grooves 2194 in the plug 2190. The plug 2190 contains pins 2196 of curved section, located so that the amb curved surfaces 2168 2163 drive pusher rod. The plug 2190 is not attached directly to the holding pin 2180, so the surgeon may decide to manually extend the holding pin 2180. The holding pin 2180 extends automatically if the surgeon decides not to use the holding pin 2180 when the closing bolt assembly 2072 extends distally to the closed position. The surgeon must retract the holding pin 2180 manually. With this design of the holding pin drive mechanism 2160, it is possible to manually close and retract the holding pin 2180. If the surgeon does not manually close the holding pin 21280, the existing holding pin drive mechanism 2160 will do this automatically while holding the tool. For more information on the activation and use of the retaining pin, see US Pat. Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587.

The end effector 2000 may also be equipped with various sensors connected to the end effector contact plate 2120 mounted in the end effector housing 2010. For example, the end effector 2000 may include a closure sensor 2122 mounted in the end effector housing 2010 and electrically connected to the end effector contact plate 2120 so that when the end effector 2000 is operatively connected to the surgical instrument, the closure sensor 2122 communicates with the surgical control system tool. The closure sensor 2122 may include a Hall sensor 7028, as shown below in connection with FIG. 61, 63, configured to detect the position of the protrusion of the switch 2086 on the closure nut 21084. See FIG. 40. In addition, the trigger sensor 2124 may also be installed in the end effector housing 2010 and is configured to locate the trigger nut 2110 in the closure nut 2084. The trigger sensor 2124 may include a Hall sensor 7028, as described below in connection with FIG. 61, 63 and be electrically connected to the end effector contact plate 2120 for ultimate communication with a surgical instrument control system as described above. The contact plate 2120 may be located in the end effector body 2020 so that when the end effector 2000 is operatively connected to the surgical instrument, the end effector contact plate 2120 is electrically connected to the surgical instrument contact plate 30 mounted in the surgical instrument body 12, as described above.

The use of the end effector 2000 in connection with the surgical instrument 10 is described below. However, it should be understood that the end effector 2000 can be operatively connected to various other surgical instrument designs described herein. Before use, the closing barrel 2080 and the launching barrel 2102 are “locked” or located in their initial positions to facilitate attachment to the first and second drive shafts 22, 42, respectively. For example, to connect the end effector 2000 to the surgical instrument 10, the doctor moves the end effector 2000 to a position where the axis of the CSA-CSA closure shaft is aligned with the axis of the first FDA-FDA drive shaft and the axis of the FSA-FSA trigger shaft is aligned with the axis of the second drive shaft SDA-SDA. The female connector 57 on the closing barrel 2080 engages in functional interaction with the pin connector 51 on the first drive shaft 22. Similarly, the female connector 57 'on the trigger shaft 2102 interacts with the pin connector 51 on the second drive shaft 42. Thus, being in in this position, the closure barrel 2080 is operatively connected to the first drive shaft 22, and the launch barrel 2102 is operatively connected to the second drive shaft 42. The contact plate 1120 of the end effector is functionally connected to the contact plate 30 of the surgical instrument so that the sensors within the end effector 2000 are in functional communication with the control system of the surgical instrument. To hold the end effector 2000 in interconnected functional interaction with the surgical instrument 10, the end effector 2000 includes a stopper latch 2130 attached to the end effector body 2010 and detachably engages with a portion of the tool body 12. The stopper latch 2130 may include a retaining protrusion 2132 , which can detachably interact with the cavity 15 of the limiter formed in the housing 12. See. Fig. 1. When connected together, the closing sensor 2122 detects the position of the closing nut 2084, and the starting sensor 2124 detects the position of the starting nut 2110. This information is sent to the control system of the surgical instrument. In addition, the doctor can confirm that the shiftable transmission unit (or its transmission carriage 62) is in the first drive position. This can be confirmed by the activation of the indicator light 77 on the housing 12, as described above. If the shiftable transmission assembly 60 is not in its first drive position, the doctor can activate the trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to the first drive position so that the activation of the swing switch 110 to activate the engine 80 will activate the first drive system 20. If the closing system 2070 and the starting system 2100 are in their respective initial positions, and the unspent cartridge module 2060 with staples is correctly installed in the end effector 2000, the doctor may activate Vat closing system 2070 to capture the target tissue between the module 2060 and the cassette unit 2140 stops.

The doctor can distally move the closing bolt assembly 2072 by acting on the start switch-swing 110 to turn on the engine 80 and rotate the first drive shaft 22. This activation moves the cassette module 2060 to the stop assembly 2140 to clamp the target tissue between them. As the closing bolt 2072 moves distally, the interaction of the rods 2073 and the yoke 2190 will activate the tissue retainer pin drive mechanism 2160, pushing the holding pin 2180 distally through the platform portion 2161 and through the stop assembly 2140 into the pin recess 2141 therein (see FIG. 41) . The holding pin 2180 serves to capture the target tissue between the stop assembly 2140 and the cartridge module 2060. After the target tissue is sandwiched between the stop assembly 2140 and the cassette module 2060, the doctor will be able to activate the trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to its second drive position, so that activating the engine 80 will rotate the second drive shaft 42. When the carriage the gear 62 is moved to the second drive position, the doctor can once again activate the trigger switch-swing 110 to activate the second drive system 40, and the trigger system 2100 in the end effector 2000 will distally launch the trigger rod assembly 2112 Which also pushes the element scalpel 2115 distally through the cartridge module 2060, cutting the target tissue clamped between the node 2140 and the stop module 2060 cassettes. As the trigger rod assembly 2112 moves distally, the drive member 2114 also ejects the surgical staples held in the cartridge module 2060 from the cartridge module 2060 through the target tissue and into forming contact with the stop assembly 2140. After the cutting and stapling action is completed, the doctor can activate the start switch-swing 110 to reverse the direction of rotation of the engine and return the start-up system 2100 to its initial position. Then, with the help of the start hook 92, the doctor can return the transmission carriage 62 to its first drive position, so that activating the start switch-swing 110 in the opposite direction will cause the engine 80 to turn in the opposite direction, returning the closing bolt assembly 2073 to its initial position position. As the closing bolt assembly 2073 moves in the proximal direction, the yoke 2190 can interact with the tissue retainer pin drive 2160 to retract the holding pin 2180 to its initial position. Alternatively, the doctor can manually pull the holding pin 2180 to its initial position using the saddle-shaped slider 2162. The doctor can pull the holding pin 2180 to its initial position until the closing system 2070 is activated to return the closing bolt 2072 to its initial position. For more information on the use of a curved cutting-squeezing tool, see US Pat. Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587.

In FIG. 42-45 depict a surgical end effector 3000 comprising a surgical cutting and stapling instrument. It refers to a type of instrument commonly referred to as a “circular surgical stapling instrument”. For certain types of surgical interventions, the use of surgical stapling instruments is the preferred method of connecting tissue. Thus, specially configured surgical stapling tools for these applications have been developed. For example, there are intraluminal or circular stapling instruments for performing surgery on the lower colon, where sections of the lower colon are joined together after excision of the affected segment. Circular stapling instruments used to perform such operations are disclosed, for example, in US Pat. Nos. 5,104,025; 5,205,459; 5,285,945; 5,309,927; 8,353,439; and 8,360,297, the contents of each of which is fully incorporated herein by reference.

As seen in FIG. 42, the end effector 3000 comprises an end effector body 3010, which may be made of segments of the body 3012, 3014 interconnected to be removable by means of screws, bulges, snap elements, etc. An extension barrel assembly 3020 protrudes from the end effector body 3010. An elongated barrel assembly 3020 is configured to provide functional support and interaction with a tool circular head 3300 and an emphasis 3320. In the above US Patent Examples, it is indicated that many different circular cartridge designs with brackets and an abutment are known in the art. For example, as shown in FIG. 43, the head 3300 of a circular stapling tool may include a body member 3302 that holds the cassette support assembly in the form of a circular bracket ejector assembly 3304 configured to dock with the circular cassette 3306 with brackets and push the brackets therein into forming contact with the bottom surface 3326 the formation of the brackets stop 3320. The circular element 3308 of the scalpel is also located in the center of the node 3304 ejector brackets. The proximal end of the housing member 3302 may be connected to the outer tubular housing 3022 of the arcuate assembly of the shaft 3020 using a distal member of the coupler 3024. The stop 3320 includes a circular body portion 3322 having a stop barrel 3324 for attaching a trocar to it. The stop body 3322 has a lower surface for forming the staples 3326 and may also have a cap 3328 attached to its distal end. The stop barrel 3324 may also be equipped with a pair of trocar holding clips or leaf springs 3330, which serve to detachably hold the trocar 3042 in a holding interaction with the stop barrel 3324, as will be discussed in more detail below.

In one embodiment, the barrel assembly 3020 includes a compression barrel 3030, a distal portion of the compression barrel 3032, and a coupling collar assembly 3040, which are functionally held in the outer tube cap 3022. The trocar tip 3042 is attached to the distal end of the coupling collar assembly 3040 by fasteners 3041. As is known , the tip 3042 of the trocar can be inserted into the barrel 3324 of the stop 3320 and held in conjunction with the holding clamps of the trocar 3330.

The surgical end effector 3000 further includes a closure system 3070 and a trigger system 3100. In at least one embodiment, the closure system 3070 includes a closure nut assembly 3084 attached to the proximal end of the coupling collar 3040. As seen in FIG. 42 and 43, the closure nut assembly 3084 includes a proximal connector 3085 attached to the proximal end of the coupling collar 3040 by a fastener 3087. The closure system 3070 further includes a closure barrel with a thread 3080 that is threadedly connected to the closure nut 3084. The closure barrel 3080 forms the axis of the CSA-CSA closure shaft and has a female connector 57 attached to its proximal end to facilitate coupling of the 3080 closure shaft with a pin connector 51 attached to the first drive shaft at the surgical instrument. Turning the closing barrel 3080 in a first direction causes the closing nut 3084 to push the turnbuckle assembly 3040 in the distal direction DD. Turning the closing barrel 3080 in the opposite direction likewise results in a proximal movement of the closing nut 3084 and the tie clamp assembly 3040.

As seen in FIG. 43, the distal portion 3032 of the compression shaft is connected to the bracket ejector assembly 3304. Thus, the axial movement of the compression barrel 3030 inside the outer tubular cover 3022 acts on the bracket ejector assembly 3304 for axial movement within the housing member 3302. The axial movement of the compression barrel 3030 is controlled by the trigger system 3100. In one embodiment, the trigger system 3100 includes a trigger barrel with a thread 3102 that is threadedly connected to a threaded trigger nut 3110 attached to the proximal end of the compression barrel 3030. The trigger barrel 3102 forms the axis of the FSA trigger barrel -FSA parallel or substantially parallel to the axis of the CSA-CSA closure shaft. See, for example, FIG. 44 and 45. The proximal end of the trigger shaft 3102 has a female connector 57 attached thereto to facilitate the connection of the trigger barrel 3102 with a pin connector 51 attached to the second drive shaft of the surgical instrument. Activating the second drive system of the surgical instrument in one direction of rotation will rotate the launch barrel 3102 in the first direction, thereby pushing the compression shaft 3030 in the distal direction “DD”. As the compression shaft 3030 moves in the distal direction “DD”, the circular staple ejector assembly 3304 is distally ejected to surgically eject the staples from the cassette 3306 with staples into forming contact with the lower side 3326 of the stop body 3322. In addition, the circular scalpel member 3308 is pushed through a tissue sandwiched between the stop body 3322 and the cassette 3306 with brackets. The activation of the second drive system in the second direction of rotation leads to the movement of the compression shaft 3030 in the proximal direction "PD".

The end effector 3000 may also be equipped with various sensors connected to the end effector contact plate 3120 mounted in the end effector housing 3010. For example, end effector 3000 may include closure sensor (s) 3122 mounted in end effector housing 3010 and electrically connected to end effector contact plate 3120 so that when end effector 3000 is operatively connected to a surgical instrument, closure sensor (s) 3122 communicates with the surgical instrument control system. Closure sensor (s) 3122 may (gut) include Hall sensors 7028, as described below in connection with FIG. 61, 63, configured to detect the position of the closing nut 3084. See FIG. 44. In addition, the trigger sensor (s) 3124 may also be installed (s) in the end effector housing 3010 and configured to detect the location of the trigger nut 3110 in the closing nut 3084. The trigger (s) the sensor (s) 3124 may (gut) also include Hall sensors 7028, as described below in connection with FIG. 61, 63, and to be electrically connected (s) to the end effector contact plate 3120 for ultimate communication with a surgical instrument control system, such as a handle processor 7024, for example, described below in connection with FIG. 61, 63, 64. The contact plate 3120 may be located in the end effector body 3020 such that when the end effector 3000 is operatively connected to the surgical instrument, the end effector contact plate 3120 is electrically connected to the surgical instrument contact plate 30 installed in the surgical instrument housing 12 as described above.

The use of the end effector 3000 in connection with the surgical instrument 10 is described below. However, it should be understood that the end effector 3000 can be operatively connected to various other surgical instrument designs described herein. Before use, the closing barrel 3080 and the launch barrel 3102 are “locked” or located in their initial positions to facilitate attachment to the first and second drive shafts 22, 42, respectively. For example, to connect the end effector 3000 to the surgical instrument 10, the doctor moves the end effector 3000 to a position where the axis of the CSA-CSA closure shaft is aligned with the axis of the first FDA-FDA drive shaft and the axis of the FSA-FSA trigger shaft is aligned with the axis of the second drive shaft SDA-SDA. The female connector 57 on the closing barrel 3080 interacts with the pin connector 51 on the first drive shaft 22. Similarly, the female connector 57 on the trigger barrel 3102 interacts with the pin connector 51 on the second drive shaft 42. Thus, being in this position, the closing barrel 3080 is operatively connected to the first drive shaft 22, and the launch barrel 3102 is operatively connected to the second drive shaft 42. The contact plate 3120 of the end effector is functionally oedinena with the contact plate 30 of the surgical instrument so that the sensors 3122, 3124 within the end effector 3000 are in operative communication with the surgical instrument control system. In order to keep the end effector 3000 in coupled functional interaction with the surgical instrument 10, the end effector 3000 includes a stopper latch 3130 attached to the end effector body 3010 and configured to detachably engage with a portion of the tool body 12. The stopper latch 3130 may include a retaining protrusion 3132 that can releasably cooperate with the stopper cavity 15 formed in the housing 12. See Fig. 1. When connected together, the closing sensor 3122 detects the position of the closing nut 3084, and the starting sensor 3124 detects the position of the starting nut 3110. This information is sent to the control system of the surgical instrument. In addition, the doctor can confirm that the shiftable transmission unit (or its transmission carriage 62) is in the first drive position. This can be confirmed by the activation of the indicator light 77 on the housing 12, as described above. If the shiftable transmission assembly 60 is not in its first drive position, the doctor can activate the trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to the first drive position so that the activation of the swing switch 110 to activate the engine 80 will activate the first drive system 20. If the closing system 3070 and the starting system 3100 are in their respective initial positions and the non-empty cassette module with brackets is correctly installed in the end effector 3000, the end effector 3000 is ready to use olzovaniyu.

As you know, when performing an anastomosis using a circular stapling instrument, staple stapling of the intestine can be accomplished using a conventional surgical stapling instrument by placing a plurality of rows of staples on both sides of the target portion (i.e., sample) of the intestine. The target area is usually cut simultaneously with stapling. After removal of the target sample, the doctor inserts an emphasis 3320 into the proximal part of the intestine, proximal to the staple line. This can be done by inserting the stop body 3322 into the incision made in the proximal portion of the intestine, or the stop 3320 can be inserted transanally by placing the stop 3320 at the distal end of the end effector 3000 and inserting the instrument through the rectum. Then the doctor attaches the stem 3324 stop to the tip 3042 of the trocar end effector 3000 and inserts the stop 3320 into the distal section of the intestine. The physician may then, using a thread or other conventional suturing device, attach the distal end of the proximal gut to the stem 3324 of the abutment, and also tie the proximal end of the distal portion of the gut around the stem 3324 of the abutment using another thread.

The doctor can then move the coupling collar assembly 3040, the trocar tip 3042 and the stop 3320 attached thereto in the proximal direction, acting on the start switch-swing 110 to turn on the engine 80 and start the rotation of the first drive shaft 22. This activation moves the stop 3320 to a cassette 3306 located in an element of the body 3302 of the head 3300 of the stapling instrument to close the gap between them, and thus interacts with the proximal end of the distal section of the intestine and the distal end of the proximal section guts in the gap between them. The doctor continues to activate the first drive system 20 until the desired degree of tissue compression is achieved. Once the bowel sections are sandwiched between the stop assembly 3320 and the stapling tool head 3300, the doctor can activate the trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to its second drive position, so that activating the engine 80 will rotate the second drive shaft 42. When the transfer carriage 62 moved to the second drive position, the doctor can once again act on the trigger switch-swing 110 to activate the second drive system 40 and that the trigger system 3100 in the end effector 3000 pushed the distal Compression of the barrel 3030, which will also lead to the expulsion of the distal pusher unit 3304 circular staples and a circular element 3308 scalpel. Such actions serve to cut the squeezed parts of the intestine and push the surgical staples through both the clamped ends of the intestine, thereby connecting the intestine and forming a tubular channel. At the same time, as the staples are pushed and formed, the circular knife 3308 is pushed through the ends of the intestinal tissue, cutting off the ends adjacent to the inner row of staples. After that, the doctor can remove the terminal effector 3000 from the intestine and complete the anastomosis.

In FIG. 46-49 show another surgical end effector 3000 ', which may be similar to the surgical end effector 3000 described above, except for the differences discussed below. These components of the surgical end effector 3000 ', which are identical to the components of the above described surgical end effector 3000, will be denoted by the same element numbers. These components of the surgical end effector 3000 ', which may be similar in operation but not identical to the corresponding components of the surgical end effector 3000, will be indicated by the same component numbers in combination with ““. As seen in FIG. 46-49, the surgical end effector 3000 'includes a drive trip assembly, which is generally indicated at 3090 and is advantageously configured to enable the physician to release the distal portion of the drive mechanism from the proximal portion of the drive mechanism.

In the illustrated embodiment, the drive release assembly 3090 is used in conjunction with the closure system 3070 ', so that if the distal portion of the closure system accidentally seizes or otherwise limits the operability of the closure, the doctor can quickly mechanically disconnect the distal portion of the drive mechanism from the proximal portion of the drive mechanism of the closure system mechanically. More precisely and with reference to FIG. 47, the tie rod assembly 3040 and the tip of the trocar 3042 (see FIGS. 42, 43 and 45) may be referred to as the “distal portion of the drive mechanism” 3092 of the closure system 3070 ′, and the closure barrel 3080 and the closure nut assembly 3084 may, for example, be called “proximal plot drive mechanism "3094 closing system 3070 '. As shown in FIG. 47, one form of the actuator release assembly 3090 includes a distal coupling 3095 attached to the proximal end of the coupling collar 3040. The distal coupling 3095 can be attached to the coupling collar 3040 by tightening, adhesive bonding, low temperature brazing, welding and etc., or any combination of such mounting configurations. The size of the distal connecting element 3095 allows it to be slidably received within the groove 3097 in the proximal connecting element 3085 'attached to the cover nut assembly 3084. The distal connecting element 3095 includes a distal opening 3096 passing through it and configured to align along the axis with the proximal opening 3098 in the proximal connecting element 3085 'when placing the distal connecting element 3095 inside the groove 3097. See FIG. 48. The drive release assembly 3090 further comprises a drive connecting pin 3099, the size of which allows it to be received within the axially aligned holes 3096, 3098, reliably connecting the distal connecting element 3095 to the proximal connecting element 3085 ′. In other words, the drive connecting pin 3099 serves to mechanically couple the distal portion of the drive mechanism 3092 to the proximal portion of the release portion of the drive mechanism 3094. The drive connection pin 3099 extends along the CA-CA connection axis, transverse to the CSA closure shaft. To ensure the clearance required to move the drive connecting pin 3099 axially relative to the starting nut 3110, an axial groove 3111 is provided in the starting nut 3110. As can be seen in FIG. 46, a portion 3014 ′ of the end effector body is provided with an axially extending clearance 3016, which facilitates the axial movement of the drive connecting pin 3099 when the closing system 3070 ′ is activated. This configuration allows the physician to quickly disconnect the distal portion of the drive mechanism 3092 from the proximal portion of the drive mechanism 3094 at any time during the application of the end effector 3000 'by removing or pulling the connecting pin 3099 of the drive in the transverse direction from the holes 3096, 3098, which allows you to release the distal connecting element 3095 from the proximal connecting element 3085 '.

Although the drive release assembly 3090 has been described with reference to the end effector 3000 ’closing system 3070, in an alternative embodiment, the drive release assembly can be used with the end effector 3000’ trigger system 3100. In other configurations, the drive release assembly 3090 may be coupled to the closure system, and the second drive release assembly may be coupled to the starter system. Thus, one or both proximal portions of the drive mechanism can be selectively mechanically disconnected from their respective distal portions of the drive mechanism. Additionally, such a drive release assembly can be effectively used in conjunction with the closure and / or start-up systems of at least some of the other surgical end effectors described herein, including, without limitation, end effector 1000 and end effector 2000 and their respective equivalent configurations.

In FIG. 50-53, another surgical end effector 2000 ′ is shown, which may be identical to the surgical end effector 2000 described above, except for the differences discussed below. These components of the surgical end effector 2000 ', which are identical to the components of the above-described surgical end effector 2000, will be denoted by the same element numbers. These components of the surgical end effector 2000 ', which may be similar in operation but not identical to the corresponding components of the surgical end effector 2000, will be indicated by the same component numbers in combination with ““. As shown in FIG. 51-53, the surgical end effector 2000 'may be provided with indicator structures to provide a visual indication of the actuation status of the closing and starting systems.

More specifically and with reference to FIG. 51 and 52, the closure system 2070 includes a closure system status node substantially designated as 2090. In one form, for example, the closure system status node 2090 includes a closure indication element 2092 attached to or otherwise extending from the closure nut 2084 ′ . The status node of the closing system 2090 further includes a closing indication window 2094 or an opening in the end effector body 2010 so that the doctor can evaluate the position of the closing indication element 2092 by observing the closing indication element 2092 through the closing indication window 2094. Similarly, the starting system 2100 'may include a start-up system status node, generally designated 2130. In one form, for example, the start-up system status node 2130 includes a start indication element 2132 attached to or otherwise passing from the starting nut 2110 '. The status node of the launch system 2130 further includes a start indication window or a hole 2134 in the end effector housing 2010 so that the doctor can evaluate the position of the start indication element 2132 by observing the start indication element 2132 through the start indication window 2134.

The status node of the closing system 2090 and the status node of the starting system 2130 show the mechanical state of the closing system 2070 and the starting system 2100. The physician can essentially monitor the mechanical condition of the distal end of the end effector, but sometimes it is covered or blocked by tissue. The mechanical state of the proximal portion of the end effector cannot be seen without the design of a window or a protruding indicator. In addition, the color marking on the outer surface of the barrel and / or on the indicator can also be used to notify the doctor of the complete closure or start of the end effector (for example, the indicator is completely in the green color field - complete closure). For example, a closure indication 2093 may be affixed to the closure indication element 2092, visible through the closure indication window 2094. In addition, the housing 2010 may have a first closure indication device 2095 and a second closure indication device 2096 next to the closure indication window 2094 to evaluate the position of the closure indicator 2092. For example, the first closing indicating device 2095 may comprise a first bolt of a first color (eg, orange, red, etc.), and the second closing indicating device may comprise a bolt or segment of a second color An eta that differs from the first color (for example, green). When combining the closing mark 2093 on the closing indication element 2092 with the most proximal end of the crossbar of the first closing indicating device 2095 (this position is indicated by the element number 2097 in FIG. 50), the doctor can see that the closing system 2070 is in an inactive position. With the closure mark 2093 located within the crossbar of the first closure indication device 2095, the physician can see that the closure system 2070 is partially activated, but not fully or completely closed. When combining the closing mark 2093 with the second closing indication device 2096 (indicated by element number 2098 in FIG. 50), the doctor can see that the closing system 2070 is fully activated or is in the fully closed position.

Likewise, a start mark 2133 can be applied to the start indication element 2132, visible through the start indication window 2134. In addition, the housing segment 2014 'may have a first start indication device 2135 and a second start indication device 2136 next to the start indication window 2134 for evaluation the position of the start indicator 2132. For example, the first start indicating device 2135 may comprise a first starting crossbar of a first launch color (eg, orange, red, etc.), and the second starting indicating device may comprise a second starting crossbar or and a segment of a second start color different from the first start color (for example, green). When combining the trigger mark 2133 on the trigger indication element 2132 with the most proximal end of the bolt of the first trigger indication device 2135 (this position is represented by element number 2137 in FIG. 50), the doctor can see that the trigger system 2100 is in the inactive position. When aligning the start mark 2133 within the crossbar of the first trigger indication device 2135, the doctor can see that the start system 2100 is partially activated, but not fully activated or not fully started. When aligning the start mark 2133 with the second trigger indication device 2136 (indicated by element number 2138 in FIG. 50), the doctor can see that the start system 2170 is fully activated or fully started. Thus, the doctor can determine the degree of response of the closing and starting systems by observing the position of the indicators through the corresponding windows.

In an alternative configuration, display windows 2094 and 2134 can be provided in the end effector housing 2010 ′ so that when the closing system 2070 and start system 2100 ′ are in the start or inactive position, the corresponding indicators 2092, 2132 can be fully visible through the display windows 2094, 2134, respectively. When the closing system 2070 and the starting system 2100 'are triggered, their indicators 2092, 2132 move outside the display window 2094, 2134. Then the doctor can evaluate the degree of activation of each of the systems 2070, 2100', checking how indicators 2092, 2132 are visible through the windows 2094, 2134 .

The status node of the closing system 2090 and the status node of the starting system 2130 reflect the mechanical state of the closing system 2070 and the starting system 2100, regardless of whether the end effector 2000 ′ is attached to the handle or body of the surgical instrument or not. If the end effector 2000 is attached to the handle or the housing, the status node of the closing system 2090 and the status node of the starting system 2130 will allow the physician to determine the mechanical condition of these systems by primary or secondary verification of the status shown on the handle or housing of the surgical instrument. The status node of the closure system 2090 and the status node of the trigger system 2130 also serve as an initial check when the end effector 2000 'is disconnected from the handle or body of the surgical instrument. Additionally, such nodes of the closing system status and the starting system status can be effectively used together with the closing and / or starting systems in at least some other surgical end effectors described herein, including but not limited to, for example, end effector 1000 and end effector 3000, and their respective equivalent configurations.

In FIG. 54-60 show another 2000ʺ surgical end effector, which may be identical to the 2000 ′ surgical end effector described above, except for the differences discussed below. The components of the surgical end effector 2000ʺ, the same as the components of the surgical end effector 2000 ′ and / or end effector 2000 described above, will be denoted by the same element numbers. The components of the surgical end effector 2000ʺ, which may be similar in operation, but not identical to the corresponding components of the surgical end effector 2000 'and / or 2000, will be indicated by the same component numbers in combination with “'”. As shown in FIG. 54-60, the surgical end effector 2000ʺ includes a drive release assembly, essentially designated 2200, and is advantageously configured to enable the physician to release the distal portion of the drive mechanism from the proximal portion of the drive mechanism.

In the presented embodiment, the drive release assembly 2200 is used together with the closing system 2070ʺ of the end effector 2000ʺ, thus, in case of accidental jamming or other limitation of the operability of the distal portion of the closing system, the doctor can quickly mechanically disconnect the distal portion of the drive mechanism from the proximal portion of the drive mechanism of the closing system. More precisely and with reference to FIG. 56, the closing bolt assembly 2072 may also be referred to as the "distal portion of the drive mechanism" 2202 of the closing system 2070 ", and the closing barrel 2080 and the node 2084" of the closing nut may, for example, be referred to as the "proximal portion of the drive mechanism" 2204 of the closing system 2070ʺ. As shown in FIG. 59, the locking nut assembly 2084ʺ, being substantially identical to the above-described locking nut assemblies 2084, 2084 ′, is provided in two parts. More specifically, the closure nut assembly 2084ʺ includes an upper threaded 2210 configured to threadedly engage with the closure shaft 2080, and a lower portion 2214 that moves the starter nut 2110 therein along the axis, as described above. The lower portion 2214 of the closure nut assembly 2084 прикреп is attached directly to the closure bolt assembly 2072 and includes a closure indication element 2092ʺ operating according to the same principle as the closure indicator 2092 described above.

In at least one form, the drive releasing assembly 2200 includes a drive connecting pin 2220 for connecting the lower portion 2214 of the cover nut assembly 2084ʺ to the upper portion 2210. As shown in FIG. 59, for example, the upper portion 2210 of the closing nut assembly 2084ʺ includes a dovetail groove segment 2212 configured to align with the second dovetail groove segment 2216 on the lower portion 2214 of the closing nut assembly 2014ʺ. When combining the first and second segments 2212, 2216 of the groove in the form of a dovetail, as shown in FIG. 59, they form an opening 2215 into which a portion 2222 of the cylinder of the drive connecting pin 2220 can be inserted to join the upper and lower portions 2010 and 2014 together, as shown in FIG. 56. In other words, the drive connecting pin 2220 serves to mechanically connect the distal portion of the drive mechanism 2202 to the proximal portion of the drive mechanism 2204 of the closing system 2070ʺ with the possibility of release. The drive connection pin 2220 extends along the CA-CA connection axis, transverse to the CSA closure shaft. See FIG. 56. To provide the clearance required to move the drive connecting pin 2220 along the axis along with the closing nut assembly 2084ʺ, a groove 2224 passing along the axis is provided in the housing segment 2014ʺ of the end effector 2010ʺ housing. This configuration allows the doctor to quickly disconnect the distal portion 2202 of the drive mechanism from the proximal section 2204 of the drive mechanism at any time in the process of using the end effector 2000ʺ by removing or pulling the connecting pin 2220 of the drive in the transverse direction from ERSTU 2215 formed by the segments 2212, 2216 of the groove a dovetail. After removing the drive connecting pin 2220 from the opening 2215, the lower portion 2214 of the closure assembly 2084ʺ can move relative to the upper portion 2212, thereby allowing release of tissue from a position between the cartridge module 2060 and the stop assembly 2140.

In FIG. 54-56 show the end effector 2000ʺ in the "open" position before use. As shown in these FIGS., For example, the cartridge module 2060 is installed and ready for use. In FIG. 57 and 58 show the end effector 2000 in the closed state. In other words, the closing bolt 2080 is turned towards the closing nut assembly 2084ʺ in the distal direction DD. Since the lower portion 2214 of the closing nut assembly 2084ʺ is attached to the upper portion 2210 by the drive connecting pin 2220, the locking bolt assembly 2072 (since it is attached to the lower portion 2214) also moves distally to the closed position to capture the target tissue between the cassette module 2260 and the stop assembly 2140 . As discussed above, by distally moving the saddle-button slider 2162 on the housing 2010ʺ, the holding pin passes through the cartridge body to the stop assembly 2140, thereby clamping the fabric between the cartridge module 2060 and the stop assembly 2140. As discussed in detail above, with the distal movement of the closing nut assembly 2084ʺ, the starting nut 2110 also moves distally, causing the proximal portion 2106 of the starting barrel 2102 to exit the elongated channel inside the female connector 57 '. See FIG. 58. In FIG. 59 shows a drive connecting pin 2220 removed from a hole 2215 formed by dovetail groove segments 2212, 2216. After removing the drive pin 2220 from the hole 2215, the proximal portion 2202 of the drive mechanism (closing bolt assembly 2072) can be moved in the proximal direction “PD” by the proximal movement of the saddle-button slider 2162. Such movement of the button 2162 will move the closing bolt assembly 2072, the lower portion 2014, the closing nut assembly 2084ʺ, the starting nut 2110 and the starting bolt assembly 2112, will also hold the pin in the proximal position. This movement will release the fabric from a position between the cartridge module 2060 and the stop assembly 2140.

in FIG. 61 is a block diagram of a modular surgical instrument 7000 with a drive comprising a grip portion 7002 and a stem portion 7004; The modular surgical instrument 7000 with a drive is a representative representative of the modular surgical instrument system, essentially indicated by paragraph 2, which in one form includes a surgical instrument 10 with a drive, which can be used in combination with various surgical end effectors, such as, for example, end effectors 1000, 2000 and 3000, as shown in FIG. 1. Given the above detailed description of various functional and operational aspects of a modular surgical instrument 10 with a drive, for the sake of brevity and clarity of presentation, these details will not be repeated in the following description relating to FIG. 61-64. In addition, the description of FIG. 61-64 will concentrate mainly on the functional and operational aspects of the electrical systems and subsystems of the modular surgical instrument 7000 with a drive, which can be applied in whole or in part to the above description of a modular surgical instrument with a drive.

Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 61, a modular surgical instrument 7000 with a drive, comprises a grip portion 7002 and a stem portion 7004. The grip and stem portions 7002, 7004 comprise respective electrical subsystems 7006, 7008 electrically connected via communications and a power device interface 7010. The components of the electrical subsystem 7006 of the grip portion 7002 are held on the control board 100 described above. The communications and power supply interface 7010 are configured such that electrical signals and power can be freely exchanged between the grip portion 7002 and the stem portion 7004.

In the presented example, the electrical subsystem 7006 of the grip portion 7002 is electrically connected to various electrical elements 7012 and the display 7014. In one embodiment, the display 7014 is an organic LED display (OLED), but the display 7014 should not be limited to this context. The electrical subsystem 7008 of the stem portion 7004 is electrically connected to various electrical elements 7016, which will be described in more detail below.

In one aspect, the electrical subsystem 7006 of the grip portion 7002 comprises a solenoid pusher 7018, an accelerometer 7020, an engine controller / driver 7022, a handle processor 7024, and a voltage regulator 7026, and is configured to receive input signals from a plurality of switches 7028. Although, in the present embodiment, switches 7028 identified as switches on the Hall sensor, switches 7028 are not limited in this context. In various aspects, Hall sensors or switches 7028 may be located in the end effector portion of the instrument, barrel, and / or handle.

In one aspect, the electrical subsystem 7006 of the grip portion 7002 is configured to receive signals from a solenoid 7032, a clamp position sensor 7034, a start position switch 7036, an engine 7038, a battery 7040, an OLED interface board 7042, an open switch 7044, a close switch 7046, and a start switch 7048 In one aspect, the 7038 motor is a brushless DC motor, although in various aspects the motor is not limited in this context. However, a description of engine 7038 can be applied to the above engines 80, 480, 580, 680, 750, and 780. Solenoid 7032 is a typical example of the previously described shifting solenoid 71.

In one aspect, the electrical subsystem 7008 of the stem portion 7004 comprises a trunk processor 7030. The electrical subsystem 7008 of the barrel is configured to receive signals from various switches and sensors located in the portion of the end effector of the instrument, and indicating the state of the clamping jaws and the cutting element in the end effector. As shown in FIG. 61, the barrel electrical subsystem 7008 is configured to receive signals from the clip open state switch 7050, the clip closed state switch 7052, the start start state switch 7054, and the start end state switch 7056, which indicate the state of the clamp and the cutting element.

In one aspect, the handle processor 7024 may be a general purpose microcontroller suitable for use in medical and surgical instruments, and including movement controls. In one embodiment, the handle processor 7024 may be a Texas Instruments TM4C123BH6ZRB microcontroller. The handle processor 7024 may include, among other elements, a 32-bit ARM® Cortex ™ -M4 80 MHz processor core with a system timer (SysTick), an integrated integrated vector interrupt controller (NVIC), and an active timer interrupt controller (WIC), a memory protection unit (MPU), a single-precision floating-point processing module (FPU) complying with the IEEE754 standard, built-in trace macros and a trace port, a system control unit (SCB), and a thumb-2 instruction set. The handle processor 7024 may comprise integrated memory such as 256 KB single-cycle flash memory up to 40 MHz. A prefetch buffer may be provided to increase performance above 40 MHz. Additional memory includes 32 KB of single-cycle random access memory (SRAM), internal ROM loaded with TivaWare ™ for C Series software, 2 KB of flashing ROM, among other elements, such as two controller area network (CAN) modules ) using the CAN protocol version 2.0 part A / B with a transfer rate of up to 1 Mbps.

In one aspect, the grip processor 7024 may include advanced serial integration tools, including eight universal asynchronous receivers / transmitters (UARTs) with 9 bit IrDA support, and ISO 7816 (one UART scheme with modem status and modem data flow control). Four Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) modules are provided to support Freescale SPI, MICROWIRE, or Texas Instruments synchronous serial interfaces. In addition, six Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) modules provide, for example, standard (100 Kbit / s) and fast (400 Kbit / s) transmission and support for sending and receiving data as a master or slave.

In one aspect, the grip processor 7024 also includes a 32-channel configurable μDMA ARM PrimeCell® controller that allows the transfer of data from the Cortex ™ -M4 processor, making it possible to more efficiently use the processor and available bus bandwidth. The support function for working with analog signals includes, for example, two 12-bit analog-to-digital converters (ADCs) with 24 analog input channels and a sampling frequency of one million measurements / s, three analog comparators, 16 digital comparators and one controller integrated in the chip voltage.

In one aspect, the grip processor 7024 also has an advanced motion control function, such as eight pulse width modulation (PWM) generator blocks, each with one 16-bit counter, two PWM comparators, a PWM signal generator, a pause generator and a selector interrupt / ADC trigger. Eight PWM emergency inputs are provided to terminate low latency operation. There are two quadrature encoder interface (QEI) interface modules with a position integrator for tracking the position of sensors and recording speed using the built-in timer.

In one aspect, two ARM FiRM-compatible watchdog timers are provided, as well as six general purpose 32-bit timers (up to twelve 16-bit). There are six wide 64-bit general purpose timers (up to twelve 32-bit), as well as, for example, 12 16/32-bit and 12 32/64-bit capture / compare / PWM contacts (capture compare PWM, CCP). Up to 120 general purpose inputs / outputs (GPIOs) can be provided, depending on configuration, with programmable control of GPIO interrupts and contact configurations and a high degree of flexibility for multiplexing contacts. The handle processor 7024 also contains a low-power hibernation module with battery backup and a real-time clock. There are many time sources for the clock in the microcontroller system, and they include a precision oscillator (PIOSC), a master oscillator (MOSC), an external oscillator 32.768 kHz for the hibernation module, and an internal oscillator 30 kHz.

In one aspect, the accelerometer 7020 of the electrical subsystem 7006 of the grip portion 7002 may be a microelectromechanical system (MEMS) displacement sensor. As you know, MEMS technology combines computers with miniature mechanical devices such as sensors, valves, gears, mirrors and actuators built into semiconductor chips. In one example, the MEMS-based accelerometer 7020 may be an ultra-low-power 8-bit three-axis digital accelerometer, such as, for example, the LIS331DLM manufactured by STMicroelectronics.

In one aspect, the 7020 accelerometer, such as the LIS331DLM, can be an ultra-low-power, high-performance, three-axis linear accelerometer belonging to the nano family, with standard output via an I2C / SPI digital serial interface, suitable for communicating with the handle processor 7024. The 7020 accelerometer can be characterized by ultra-low power consumption operating modes, which provides advanced power-saving features and hi-tech sleep mode functions - exiting sleep mode. The accelerometer 7020 may include dynamic user selectable full scales of ± 2g / ± 4g / ± 8g and is capable of measuring accelerations with a frequency of output data, for example, from 0.5 Hz to 400 Hz.

In one aspect, the accelerometer 7020 may include a self-test function that allows the user to verify the operation of the sensor during final use. The accelerometer 7020 may be configured to generate an interrupt signal as a result of inertial activation / free fall events, as well as depending on the position of the instrument itself. Thresholds and time parameters of interrupt generators can be programmed on the go.

In one aspect, the motor controller / driver 7022 may be a three-phase brushless DC controller (BLDC) and a MOSFET driver, such as, for example, an Allegro controller / driver A3930. A controller / driver 7022 of a 3-phase brushless DC motor can be used with externally powered N-channel MOS transistors, for example, to drive a 7038 BLDC motor. In one embodiment, the motor controller / driver 7022 may include a circuitry necessary effective three-phase electric drive system. In one embodiment, the motor controller / driver 7022 contains a charge pump controller to provide adequate (> 10 V) valve shut-off voltage for battery voltages up to 7 V and allows the motor controller / driver 7022 to operate with a reduced valve shut-off voltage, with a battery voltage of up to 5, 5 V. Power dissipation in the charge pump controller can be minimized by switching from a voltage doubling mode at a low supply voltage to a reset mode at a rated operating voltage of 14 V. In one aspect, d To provide the voltage required for the operation of N-channel MOSFETs higher than the battery voltage, a boost capacitor is used. An internal charge pump to drive the upper arm provides direct current (100% duty cycle).

The maximum load current is regulated by an internal fixed frequency PWM current control circuit. The peak load current limit can be set by selecting the input reference voltage and an external measuring resistor. The PWM frequency can be set using a user-selected resistive-capacitive (RC) timing network. For added flexibility, PWM input can be used to control speed and torque, allowing the internal current control circuit to set a limit on the maximum current.

The efficiency of the motor controller / driver 7022 can be improved by using synchronous detection. Power MOSFETs are protected from breakdown by an integrated critical potential monitoring circuit with a dead time. A dead time can be set using one external resistor.

In one aspect, the motor controller / driver 7022 indicates a logic error resulting from a combination of all zeros at the inputs from the Hall sensors. Other features of the motor controller / driver 7022 include a high-current three-phase shutter mechanism for N-channel MOS transistors, synchronous detection, transverse conduction protection, charge pump and charge pump with interrupt for 100% PWM, integrated switching decoder circuit, range operation voltages from 5.5 to 50 V, diagnostic output, providing +5 V power to Hall sensors and sleep mode with low current consumption.

In one aspect, the 7000 modular surgical instrument with a drive is equipped with a 7038 brushless DC motor (BLDC motor, BL motor), also referred to as electronically commutated electric motor (ECM, EC motor). One such engine is the Portescap BLDC motor B0610H4314. The BLDC motor B0610H4314 can be autoclavable. The BLDC motor 7038 is a synchronous motor powered by a direct current source through an integrated inverter / switching power supply unit that generates an alternating electrical signal for driving the motor, such as the motor driver / controller 7022 described in the above paragraphs. In this context, alternating current does not imply a sinusoidal waveform, but rather suggests a bi-directional current without limiting the waveform. Additional sensors and electronic components control the output amplitude and waveform of the inverter (and thus the percentage / efficiency of using the DC bus) and frequency (i.e., rotor speed).

The rotor portion of the BLDC motor 7038 is a permanent magnet synchronous motor, but in other aspects, the BLDC motors may also be valve induction or induction motors. Although some brushless DC motors can be described as stepper motors, the term "stepper motor" is usually applied to motors that are configured to operate in a mode in which they are often stopped with a specific angular position of the rotor.

In one aspect, the BLDC motor controller / driver 7022 is to control rotor rotation. Accordingly, the controller / driver 7022 of the BLDC motor needs some kind of mechanism for determining the orientation / position of the rotor (relative to the stator coils). In one embodiment, the rotor portion of the BLDC motor 7038 is configured with Hall sensors or an angular position transmitter to directly measure the position of the rotor. In other embodiments, in order to infer the position of the rotor, reverse electromotive force (EMF) is measured in the passive coils, which eliminates the need for separate Hall sensors and, thus, they are often called sensorless controllers.

In one aspect, the BLDC motor controller / driver 7022 has 3 two-way outputs (i.e., a three-phase variable frequency output) controlled by a logic circuit. In other, simpler controllers, comparators can be used to determine the lead for the output phase, while more advanced controllers use a microcontroller to control acceleration, control speed and to fine-tune efficiency.

Linear actuators are called linear motors. The advantage of linear motors is that they can generate linear movement without the need for a transmission system, such as a ball and spindle, rack and pinion gear, cam, gears or belts, which would be necessary for rotary motors. Transmission systems are known to reduce the reaction rate and reduce accuracy. The direct drive, the BLDC motor 7038, may comprise a grooved stator with magnetic teeth and a movable actuator that comprises permanent magnets and coil windings. To obtain linear motion, the controller / driver 7022 of the BLDC motor drives the coil windings in the actuator, causing magnetic fields to interact resulting in linear motion.

In one aspect, the 7038 BLDC motor is a Portescap BO610 brushless DC motor that provides a combination of durability, efficiency, torque, and speed in a housing suitable for use with a 7000 modular surgical instrument with a drive. These 7038 BLDC motors provide the right torque intensity, speed, position control and long life. The 7038 baseless BLDC motor uses an iron-free cylindrical coil made using the same winding technique as iron-free DC motors. 7038 grooved BLDC motors can also be autoclaved. The slotted BLDC motor 7038 may include a stator consisting of stacked steel plates with windings placed in slots that are axially cut along the inner periphery. The 7038 brushless DC grooved BLDC motor delivers high torque and heat dissipation as well as high acceleration. The three-phase configuration of the BLDC 7038 motor includes star connections, Hall sensors, and the applied voltage is 4.5-24 V. The housing of the BLDC 7038 motor can be made of 303SS and the barrel can be made of 17 -4ph.

In one aspect, the switches on the Hall senders 7028 may be Hall senders sold under the trade name BU520245G and are unipolar Hall senders on an integrated circuit. Such sensors operate in the range of a supply voltage of 2.4-3.6 V.

In one aspect, in the voltage regulator 7026, instead of the conventional PNP pass-through transistor, a pass-through element of the p-channel MOS structure is used. Since the feed-through element of the p-channel MOS structure behaves like a low-value resistor, a small voltage drop, usually 415 mV at a load current of 50 A, is directly proportional to the load current. Low quiescent current (typically 3.2 μA) is stable over the entire output current range of the load (0 mA to 50 mA).

In one aspect, voltage regulator 7026 is a low voltage drop (LDO) regulator, such as the Texas Instruments LDPS voltage regulator TPS71533. These 7026 LDO voltage regulators offer advantages such as high input voltage, low voltage drop, low power operation and a miniature package. The voltage regulator 7026 can operate in the input range from 2.5 V to 24 V and is stable with any capacitor (≥0.47 μF). The low voltage drop and low quiescent current make it possible to operate at extremely low power levels, and therefore the 7026 voltage regulator is suitable for powering integrated circuits that control batteries. In particular, the voltage regulator 7026 is turned on as soon as the applied voltage reaches the minimum input voltage, and the output voltage for supplying continuously operating battery-charging integrated circuits of the grip portion 7002 becomes quickly available.

In one aspect, the battery 7040 is a lithium ion polymer (LIPO) battery; polymer-lithium-ion or more often lithium-polymer batteries (abbreviations Li-poly, Li-Pol, LiPo, LIP, PLI or LiP) are rechargeable (rechargeable) batteries. The LIPO battery 7040 may contain several identical battery cells connected in parallel to increase current capacity, and they are often offered as series-connected “blocks” to increase the total available voltage.

An additional power supply for the 7000 modular surgical instrument with a drive can be provided by a 7058 DC / DC step converter (FIG. 63-A) optimized for high power density applications such as the Texas Instruments TPS6217X family. A high switching frequency, typically 2.25 MHz, can be applied to allow the use of small inductors and to provide a fast unsteady response, as well as high accuracy of the output voltage due to the use of DCS-Control ™ topology.

Due to the wide range of operating input voltages from 3 to 17 V, the synchronous step-by-step DC / DC converter 7058 (FIG. 63-A) is well suited for a 7000 modular surgical instrument system powered by a lithium-ion or other battery, and also from intermediate buses of food 12B. In one aspect, the 7058 synchronous step-by-step constant-current converter supports a continuous output current of 0.5A at output voltages from 0.9V to 6V (in 100% utilization mode).

It is also possible to set the power switching sequence by configuring the Enable and Power Good contacts with free drain. In the power saving mode, the synchronous step-by-step constant-current / constant-current converter 7058 (FIG. 63-A) exhibits a quiescent current of approximately 17 μA at the input voltage VIN. The power saving mode is automatically and unobstructed if the load is low and high efficiency is maintained throughout the load range. In shutdown mode, the synchronous step-by-step DC / DC converter 7058 turns off, and the current consumption in the off state is less than 2 μA.

In one aspect, the OLED interface 7042 is an interface with an OLED display 7014. The OLED display 7014 contains organic LEDs in which the emitting electroluminescent layer is a film of an organic composition that studies light under the influence of electric current. This layer of organic semiconductor is located between two electrodes, and, as a rule, at least one of these electrodes is transparent. The OLED display 7014 may include OLED diodes from two main families: based on low molecular weight compounds and based on polymers. Adding mobile ions to OLED allows you to get a light emitting electrochemical cell (LEC), which has a slightly different mode of operation. In the OLED display 7014, an addressing scheme with either a passive matrix (PMOLED) or an active matrix can be used. Active-Matrix OLED (AMOLED) diodes require an assembly board with thin-film transistors to turn each individual pixel on and off, but they allow higher resolution and larger displays. In one embodiment, the 7014 OLED display operates without backlight. Consequently, it can display deeper levels of black, and the display can be thinner and lighter than a liquid crystal display (LCD), which makes it ideal for use in the grip portion 7002 of a 7000 modular surgical instrument.

In one aspect, the barrel processor 7030 from the electrical subsystem 7008 of the stem portion 7004 may be configured as an ultra low-power 16-bit microcontroller for mixed signals, such as an ultra low-power microcontroller MSP430FR5738 manufactured by Texas Instruments. The barrel processor 7030 is an ultra-low-power microcontroller consisting of several devices with a built-in non-volatile ferrite (FRAM) memory, an ultra-low-power 16-bit MSP430 CPU and additional peripheral devices oriented to different applications. Architecture, FRAM, and peripherals combined with seven low-power modes are optimized to maximize battery life in portable devices and wireless. FRAM is a new non-volatile memory combining the speed, versatility and durability of static random access memory (SRAM) with the stability and reliability of flash memory, all with low total power consumption. Peripheral devices include, among other elements, a 10-bit analog-to-digital converter, a 16-channel comparator with voltage-generating capabilities and hysteresis functions, three enhanced serial channels supporting I2C, SPI or UART protocols, and internal direct memory access (DMA) ), hardware multiplier, real-time clock, five 16-bit timers.

The barrel processor 7030 includes a 16-bit RISC architecture, a clock with a frequency of up to 24 MHz, operates in a wide range of supply voltages from 2 V to 3.6 V, and is optimized for ultra-low power. The barrel processor 7030 also includes intelligent digital peripherals, ultra low power ferroelectric random access memory, and up to 16 KB non-volatile memory. The built-in microcontroller provides ultra-low power recording, a fast recording cycle of 125 ns per word, 16 KB in 1 ms, and includes an integrated error coding and correction module (ECC) and memory protection module (MPU).

Following a description of the electrical system, subsystems, and components of the grip and stem sections 7002, 7004 of a modular surgical instrument 7000 with a drive, the functional aspects of the control system will be described. Accordingly, in operation, the electrical subsystem 7006 of the grip portion 7002 is configured to receive signals from the opening switch 7044, the closing switch 7046, and the start switch 7048 held on the housing of the grip portion 7002. When receiving a signal from the closing switch 7046, the handle processor 7024 drives the motor 7038 by starting closing the shoulder clamp. After the clamp is closed, the clamp closed state switch 7052 in the end effector sends a signal to the barrel processor 7030, which transmits information about the state of the clamp shoulder to the handle processor 7024 via the communications and power interface 7010.

After clamping the targeted tissue, the trigger switch 7048 can be activated to generate a signal received by the handle processor 7024. In response to this, the handle processor 7024 activates the transfer carriage to the second drive position so that activation of the engine 7038 will rotate the second drive shaft, as described in detail above with respect to FIG. 1-8. After placing the cutting element, the start start state switch 7054 located in the end effector sends a signal indicating the position of the cutting element to the barrel processor 7030, which transmits position data back to the handle processor 7024 via the communication and power interface 7010.

Activation of the first switch 7048 again sends a signal to the handle processor 7038, which in response activates the second drive system and the trigger system in the end effector to push the tissue-cutting element and the wedge-shaped slide assembly in the distal direction through the cassette with surgical staples. As soon as the tissue cutting element and the wedge-shaped slide assembly are pushed to the extreme distal positions in the surgical cassette with brackets, the start end switch 7056 sends a signal to the barrel processor 7030, which transmits position information to the handle processor 7024 via the 7010 interface. Now, the start switch 7048 can be activated for sending a signal to the handle processor 7024, which drives the engine 7038, causing a reverse rotation, to return the launch system to its original position.

Activating the opening switch 7044 again sends a signal to the handle processor 7024, which drives the motor 7038 to open the clip. After the clip is opened, the clip open state switch 7050 in the end effector sends a signal to the barrel processor 7030, which transmits the clip position information to the handle processor 7024. The clamp position switch 7034 and the start position switch 7036 provide signals to the handle processor 7024 indicating the respective positions of the clamp shoulder and the cutting element.

In FIG. 62 is a table 7060 showing the total runtime of the operating cycle and the requirements for the load current for various operations of the various shafts of the device; The first column 7062 on the left lists the circular, profiled and TLC devices / trunks. Such devices / trunks are compared in three different closing, opening and starting operations, as shown in the second column 7064. The third column 7066 presents the total time in seconds required for the device / barrel listed in the first column 7063 to complete one cycle . The fourth column 7068 lists the load current requirements in amperes so that the devices / shafts listed in the first column 7062 perform the operation listed in the second column 7064 for a full cycle, as indicated in the third column 7066. As indicated in the diagram, closing and opening the clamping arm for each of the devices listed in the first column 7062 requires approximately the same time. In the case of a starting operation, the circular device / barrel requires the highest load current of 15.69 A, and the TLC device / barrel requires the lowest load current of 0.69 A.

In FIG. 63-A is a detailed diagram of the electrical system of the grip portion 7002 of a modular surgical instrument 7000 with a drive; As shown in FIG. 63-A, a voltage regulator 7026, and a 7058 DC / DC converter provide operating voltages for the electrical system. The voltage regulator 7026 regulates the voltage of the battery 7040. The handle processor 7024 receives the input from the accelerometer 7020. The VSS-ON / OFF logic 7086 provides the input voltage to the handle processor 7024 and the VSS input to the DC / DC converter. current (DC-DC converter) 7058.

The three-color LED 7072 is electrically connected to the handle processor 7024. The handle processor 7024 supplies power to the red, blue, or green 7072 LEDs for visual feedback.

Three Hall sensors 7028 U10, U11, U12 have three separate outputs of Hall sensors U1_Hall1, U1_Hall2, U1_Hall3, which are connected to the handle processor 7024, as shown. The output U1_Hall3 activates the LED 7088 located on the board. In one aspect, the outputs U1_Hall1, U1_Hall2, U1_Hall3 of the Hall sensors and the ANALOG_CLAMP signal are connected to the processor 7024 to determine the position of the clamping arm and the cutting element in the end effector portion of the modular surgical instrument 7000 with the drive or the position of other instrument elements 7000.

The user switch 7070 is a typical example of the above-described “hook-toggle switch” 110, which is mounted to rotate in the pistol portion of the handle. A user switch 7070 is operable to activate a first engine switch 7044 operably coupled to a handle processor 7024. The first engine switch 7044 may be a push switch activated by turning the user switch 7070 into contact with it. Activating the first engine switch 7044 causes the engine 7038 to be activated so that the drive gear rotates in a first direction of rotation. The second engine switch 7046 is also connected to the handle processor 7024 and is selectively contacted with the user switch 7070. Activating the second engine switch 7046 activates the engine 7038 so that the drive gear rotates in the second direction. The start switch 7048 is connected to the handle processor 7024. Activating the start switch 7048 results in axial movement of the transfer carriage and extension of the cutting element, as described above.

The Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) 7074 input is also connected to the handle processor 7024. The JTAG 7074 input is an IEEE 1149.1 compliant test access port and peripheral scan architecture designed for debug ports of integrated circuits (ICs). The handle processor 7024 utilizes the JTAG 7074 to perform debugging operations such as step-by-step execution and setting of control points.

The Universal Asynchronous Interface (UART) 7076 is connected to the handle processor 7024. UART 7076 converts data between parallel and serial forms. UART 7076 is often used in conjunction with communication standards such as EIA, RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485. The word “universal” indicates that the data format and transmission rate can be adjusted. The levels of electrical signals and methods (such as differential transmission, etc.) are processed by the driver circuitry external to the UART 7076. The UART 7076 can be a separate integrated circuit (or part of it) used for serial communication via the processor serial port 1,024 handles. The UART 7076 can be included in the 1024 grip processor.

A description of the remaining functional and operational aspects of the electrical subsystem 7006 of the grip portion 7002 of the modular surgical instrument 7000 with a drive will be further described with reference to FIG. 63-B. As shown, the handle processor 7024 provides a signal activating the solenoid 7032. The shaft module 7078 transmits SHAFT _IDO, SHAFT_ID1, CLAMP_HOME, and FIRE_HOME position signals to the handle processor 7024. The gear position module 7080 signals the position of the clamp and the cutting element to the handle processor 7024. The position information provided by the barrel module 7078 and the gear position module 7080 allows the handle processor 7024 to properly activate the engine 7038 when it receives signals from the user switch 7070 to open the clip, close the clip and / or start the cutting element.

The motor controller 7022 receives commands from the handle processor 7024 and provides commands to the MOS transistor driver 7084, which activates the three-phase BLDC motor 7038 (FIG. 61). As described above, the BLDC motor controller 7022 should direct the rotation of the rotor. Accordingly, the controller / driver 7022 of the BLDC motor determines the position / orientation of the rotor relative to the stator coils. Accordingly, the rotor part of the BLDC motor 7038 is made with Hall sensors 7028 to directly measure the position of the rotor. The 7022 BLDC motor controller has 3 two-way outputs (i.e., a three-phase output with adjustable frequency), which are controlled by a logic circuit.

Accordingly, as described in FIG. 61, 63-A, 63-B and 64, an engine management system comprising an engine controller 7022, an engine driver 7084, Hall sensors 7028 for determining an engine position in combination with a gear position module 7080 and / or shaft module 7078 can be implemented with the ability to synchronize the gears so that the pin connectors in the grip portion are easily connected to the socket connectors in the stem portion of the surgical instruments described herein. Although in one case, for example, certain tolerances may be provided to facilitate displacement or keyway connection, the engine management system is configured to track the position of the gears to prevent the gears from stopping in a position that will not allow shifting relative to each other or to install two rotary keys connections. Alternatively, the engine may be capable of slow, discrete rotation during installation or shear to eliminate any small problems of desynchronization. The same problems may arise in the example described with reference to FIG. 6, when the tool is shifted between two drives, and not just when installing new end effectors. This situation can be resolved by proper synchronization of the gears using the engine management system described in relation to FIG. 61, 63-A, 63-B and 64. In other cases, transducers that track gear / barrel rotations may be used.

In FIG. 64 is a block diagram of the electrical system of the grip and stem sections of a modular surgical instrument with a drive. As shown in FIG. 64, the handle processor 7024 receives input from an open switch 7044, a close switch 7046, a start switch 7048, a clip position switch 7034, and a start position switch 7036. In addition, the handle processor 7024 receives input from the clamp initial switch 7090 and the starting trigger switch 7092 from the barrel module 7078. Based on various combinations of switch inputs, the handle processor 7024 provides proper commands to the motor 7038 and the solenoid 7032. A battery monitoring circuit 7088 monitors the input power to the handle processor 7024 relative to ground. The handle processor 7024 controls the three-color LED 7072. The accelerometer 7020 provides three-axis orientation signals to the handle processor 7024 to determine various parameters, such as the orientation of the tool 7000 and whether the tool 7000 has been dropped. The voltage regulator 7026 provides an adjustable power supply to the system. The current detection module 7094 is for analyzing the current flowing from the power supply.

In FIG. 65 shows a 7095 mechanical switching control system for eliminating microprocessor control of engine functions; In the system described in relation to FIG. 61-64, a microprocessor, such as a handle processor 7024, is used to control the operation of the engine 7038. The handle processor 7024 executes a control algorithm based on the various states of the switches set in the tool 7000. This requires the use of the handle processor 7024 and associated identification functions to provide control of the various end effectors.

However, as shown in FIG. 65, an alternative technique can be applied to control the 7038 engine, which eliminates the need for a handle processor 7024 by placing displacement switches 7096A, 7096B, 7096C, 7096D in the barrel of the end effector. The switches 7096A-D in this case are configured to enable or disable certain functions of the motor 7038 or change the direction of rotation of the motor 7038 depending on where certain components of the end effector are located. In one embodiment, a switch that indicates full extension of the cutting element can be used to switch the functions of the engine 7038 in order to change the direction of rotation and retract the cutting element. In another embodiment, the switches 7096A-D may be configured to detect pressure or force such that simply closing the stop on the fabric would provide an on / off signal to the closing motor 7038, stopping the closing movement.

In various embodiments, the surgical instrument may include a handle, an electric motor located inside the handle, a barrel adapted to attach to the handle, and an end effector extending from the barrel, the electric motor being configured to determine the function of the end effector at the end effector. In some embodiments, the surgical instrument may include a control system comprising one or more sensors, and a microprocessor that can receive input from the sensors, monitor the operation of the surgical instrument, and drive an electric motor to act as an end effector based on input from the sensors. In at least one such embodiment, a surgical instrument handle may be used with more than one barrel. For example, a trunk for linear stitching or a trunk for circular stitching can be assembled on the handle. The handle may include at least one sensor configured to detect the type of barrel assembled on it and transmit this information to the microprocessor. The microprocessor can perfectly drive the electric motor in response to incoming signals from the sensors, depending on the type of barrel assembled on the handle. For example, if the electric motor is capable of driving the end effector closure system, the microprocessor will rotate the electric motor in the first direction to close the stop of the barrel of the circular stapling tool, and in the second or opposite direction to close the stop of the trunk of the linear stapling tool. Other control systems are provided in which a similar functional motor control can be achieved without the use of a microprocessor. In at least one such embodiment, the trunks and / or handle of the surgical instrument may include switches that may actuate the surgical instrument in different ways, depending on the type of trunk assembled on the handle.

In various embodiments, the surgical instrument system may include a power source, a first engine configured to perform a first end effector function, a second engine configured to perform a second end effector function, and a control switch system configured to selectively connect the power source to the first engine and the second engine under the action of the control system of the switches. In various embodiments, such a surgical instrument system may not include a microprocessor. The first engine may be a closing motor of the closing system, configured to close the stop of the end effector, and the second engine may be a starting motor from the starting system, configured to release brackets from the cartridge with brackets of the end effector. The control system of the switches may include a switch of the closing trigger, which, when closed, can close the closing power circuit that connects the power source to the closing motor. The control system may further include a closing stroke end switch that can be opened by the closing system when the stop is in the fully closed position, and open the closing power circuit, stopping the closing motor and closing drive. The switch control system may also include a trigger switch, which may be part of a power trigger circuit connecting the power source to the starter motor. In various situations, the default starter circuit may be open, which may prevent the starter motor from being actuated before the starter circuit is closed. Therefore, one shorting of the starting hook cannot close the starting supply circuit and actuating the starting motor. The starter power circuit may further include a second end stroke closing switch, which may be closed by the closing system when the stop is in the fully closed position. Closing the start switch and the second switch of the end of the closing cycle can close the starting supply circuit and actuate the starting motor. The control circuit may further include an end-of-start switch, which may be opened by the start-up drive when the start-up drive reaches the end of the start-up cycle. Opening the end-of-start switch can open the starting power circuit and stop the starting motor. The control system may further include a second start-up end switch, which can be closed by the start-up drive and close the reversible start-up power circuit, which reverses the polarity of the power applied to the start-up motor, and drives the start-up motor in the opposite direction and pulls the start-up drive. Closing the reversing starter power circuit may also require the trigger switch to be in the closed position. When the trigger actuator reaches the fully extended position, it can close the proximal trigger switch. Closing the proximal start switch can close the reversible closing power circuit, which can reverse the polarity of the power supplied to the closing motor, and actuates the closing motor in the opposite direction, opening the stop. Closing the reversible closing power circuit may also require the closing hook switch to be in the closed position. When the stop reaches the fully open position, the stop can open the proximal closing switch, which can open the reversible closing power circuit and stop the closing motor. This is just one example.

In various embodiments, as described herein, the handle of a surgical instrument can be used with several different stem assemblies that can be selectively attached to the handle. In some embodiments, which is also described herein, the handle may be configured to detect the type of barrel assembled on the handle, and the operation of the handle may be determined by a control circuit contained within the handle. For example, the handle may include a microprocessor and at least one memory module in which a plurality of work programs can be stored and executed, each of which is configured to actuate a specific trunk assembly. Other embodiments are provided in which the handle does not include control systems; instead, each barrel assembly may contain its own control system. For example, the first barrel assembly may comprise a first control system, the second barrel assembly may comprise a second control system, and so on. In various embodiments, the handle may comprise an electric motor, a power source, such as a battery and / or input cable, and, for example, an electrical circuit configured to drive an electric motor based on control input signals from an attached barrel assembly. The handle may further comprise an actuator which, in combination with the barrel control system, can control the electric motor. In various embodiments, the handle may not contain additional control logic circuits and / or a microprocessor, for example, to control an electric motor. With the exception of the grip actuator, the control system in the shaft assembly attached to the grip may include the control logic necessary to drive the electric motor. In various embodiments, the control system of the barrel assembly may include a microprocessor, while in other embodiments it may not contain it. In some embodiments, the first control system of the first barrel assembly may include a first microprocessor, the second control system of the second barrel assembly may include a second microprocessor, etc. In various embodiments, the handle may include a first electric motor, such as a shut-off motor, and a second electric motor, such as a starting motor, wherein the control system in the attached shaft assembly can drive the closing motor and the starting motor. In some embodiments, the handle may comprise a closing actuator and a trigger actuator. With the exception of the closing actuator and the starting actuator, the control system in the shaft assembly attached to the handle may include the control logic necessary to actuate the closing engine and the starting engine. In various embodiments, the handle may include a barrel interface, and each barrel assembly may include a handle interface configured to interact with the barrel interface. The barrel interface may include an electrical connector configured to interact with the electrical connector of the handle interface when the barrel assembly is assembled on the handle. In at least one embodiment, each connector may contain only one electrical contact, and when paired, only one control channel is formed between the handle and the barrel assembly. In other embodiments, each connector may comprise two electrical contacts that form two paired pairs when attaching the barrel assembly to the handle. In such embodiments, only two control channels may be present between the handle and the barrel assembly. Other embodiments are provided in which there are more than two control channels between the handle and the barrel assembly.

In various embodiments, attachable surgical end effectors may be compatible with the handle of a surgical instrument. For example, a surgical end effector may be attached to the handle of a surgical instrument and may feed and / or implement a drive movement initiated in the handle of a surgical instrument. As shown in FIG. 73 and 74, surgical end effector 8010 may be one of several surgical end effectors that can be compatible with the handle 8000 of a surgical instrument. A variety of other surgical end effectors are described in the text of the present description and are presented in the corresponding FIG. The reader should understand that these diverse, different surgical end effectors described and presented herein may be compatible, for example, with the same handle of a surgical instrument and / or may be compatible with more than one type of handle of surgical instruments.

The handle 8000 may include drive systems that, for example, may be configured to transmit drive movement from the handle 8000 of the surgical instrument to the component, assembly and / or end effector system 8010. For example, the handle 8000 may include a first drive system 8002a and a second drive system 8004a. In some embodiments, one of the drive systems 8002a, 8004a may be configured, for example, to provide a closing drive movement to the jaw assembly of the end effector 8010 (FIG. 73), and one of the drive systems 8002a, 8004a may be configured, for example, feeding the starting drive movement to the starting element in the end effector 8010. The drive systems 8002a, 8004a can be configured to transmit linear displacement, displacement and / or translational movement from the handle 8000 to the end effector 8010. In different In alternative embodiments, the first drive system 8002a may include a drive rod 8006, which may be configured to translate and / or linearly displace after activating the first drive system 8002a. Similarly, the second drive system 8004a may include a drive rod 8008, which may be configured to translate and / or linearly displace after activating the second drive system 8004a.

In various embodiments, the end effector assembly 8010 may include a first drive system 8002b, which may correspond, for example, to a first drive system 8002a of the handle 8000, and may also include a second drive system 8004b, which may correspond, for example, to a second drive system 8004a handles 8000. In various embodiments, the first drive system 8002b in the end effector 8010 may include a drive element 8012 that can be operatively and releasably coupled to, for example, a drive piece foot 8006 of the first drive system 8002a of the handle 8000, and may, for example, be adapted to receive linear movement from the drive rod 8006. In addition, the second drive system 8004b in the end effector 8010 may include a drive element 8014, which can be functionally and is releasably connected, for example, to the drive rod 8008 of the second drive system 8004a of the handle 8000, and may, for example, be adapted to receive linear movement from the drive rod 8008.

In various embodiments, the handle 8000 and / or end effector 8010 may include a connecting structure configured to detachably connect, for example, a drive rod 8006 to a drive element 8012, and / or, for example, a drive rod 8008 to a drive element 8014. Other in other words, the connecting structure can connect the first handle system 8000 800a of the handle 8000 with the first drive system 8002b of the end effector 8010 and the second handle 8000 drive system 8004a with the second drive system of the end effector 8004b 8010, so that the driving force is initiated in the handle of the surgical instrument 8000 may transmit to the appropriate drive system, 8002b, 8004b mounted surgical end effector 8010. Although the surgical system shown in FIG. 73 and 74, includes a pair of drive systems 8002a, 8004a in the handle 8000 and a corresponding pair of drive systems 8002b, 8004b in the end effector 8010, the reader should understand that the various connection structures described herein can also be used in the surgical end effector and / or a handle comprising, for example, one drive system or more than two drive systems.

In various embodiments, the connecting structure for attaching the drive system in the handle of the surgical instrument to the drive system in the attached end effector may include a latch that can be configured to hold and secure the connection between the respective drive systems of the handle and the end effector. As described in more detail herein, the latch may be spring loaded and may be coupled, for example, to a release mechanism configured to functionally overcome spring bias, for example, to unlock, open and / or release the connecting structure. In various embodiments, the connecting structure may include independent and / or separate connecting mechanisms and / or joints for each drive system 8002b, 8004b in the surgical end effector 8010. In such embodiments, one of the drive systems 8002b, 8004b can be activated without activating another drive system 8002b, 8004b. In other embodiments, drive systems 8002b, 8004b can be activated, for example, simultaneously and / or in parallel.

In FIG. 66-72 show the 8100 connection design for use in a surgical end effector. For example, the surgical end effector may be attached to the handle 8170 (FIG. 67-69) of the surgical instrument, through the connecting structure 8100. In various embodiments, the connecting structure 8100 may include a housing or frame 8102 connector. The connector body 8102 may be located, for example, inside the proximal mounting portion of the end effector. In addition, the connector housing 8102 may include, for example, a carriage 8104, which may be movable, for example, relative to the connector housing 8102. For example, the connector housing 8102 may include a channel 8103, the size and design of which is suitable for receiving the carriage 8104 therein with the possibility of sliding and / or sliding. For example, the carriage 8104 may be enclosed in the connector housing 8102 so that the carriage 8104 is movably held in the channel 8103 and can move and / or slide within the channel 8103. The channel 8103 may, for example, direct and / or restrict the movement of the carriage 8014 relative to the housing 8102. In some embodiments, the carriage 8104 may have an inclined surface, such as a slope or wedge 8106, which may further, for example, guide and / or facilitate the movement of the carriage 8104.

In various embodiments, the connecting structure 8100 may include a trigger 8120 in sliding engagement with a slope 8106 of the carriage 8104. For example, the trigger 8120 may include an inclined surface 8122 that slides along the slope 8106 of the carriage 8104 when the trigger is moved 8120, for example, between the first or non-activated position (FIG. 68) and the second or activated position (FIG. 67 and 69). In some embodiments, the connecting structure 8100 may include a guide, such as guide rails 8110, which may be located and have a structure suitable for guiding the trigger 8120, for example, between a first, inactive position and a second, activated position. For example, the connector housing 8102 may include a pair of guide lines 8110 that may form an activation path for the trigger 8120.

In various embodiments, when the trigger 8120 moves along an activation path formed by at least one guide rail 8110 in the direction D ₁ (FIGS. 67 and 69) from an inactive position (FIG. 68) to an activated position (FIGS. 67 and 69) for example, the carriage 8104 can be moved downward or in the direction D ₃ (FIGS. 67 and 69) inside the channel 8103 by the inclined surface 8122 of the trigger mechanism 8120 and the slope 8106 of the carriage 8104. Accordingly, the activation of the trigger mechanism 8120 can shift the carriage 8104, for example, relative to housing 8102 connector, trigger 8120 and / or various other components, assemblies and / or systems of the connecting structure 8100.

In various embodiments, when the trigger 8120 is moved along at least one guide rail 8110 in the D ₂ direction (FIG. 68) from the activated position (FIGS. 67 and 69) to an inactive position (FIG. 68), for example, the carriage 8104 may shift upward or in the direction D ₄ (FIG. 68) inside the channel 8103 by the inclined surface 8122 of the trigger mechanism 8120 and the slope 8106 of the carriage 8104. Accordingly, the activation of the trigger mechanism 8120 can affect the movement of the carriage 8104, for example, relative to the connector body 8102. In some embodiments, the spring and / or other biasing mechanism may be configured to bias the carriage 8104 and / or the trigger 8120 to a predetermined position, for example, relative to the channel 8103 and / or the connector housing 8102.

As shown in FIG. 66, in various embodiments, a groove 8112 may be formed in the connector housing 8102 and / or the end effector. The size of the groove 8112 may be suitable for receiving, for example, a drive element 8172 of the handle 8170 of a surgical instrument. In some embodiments, a pair of slots 8112 may be formed in the connector housing 8102, and each slot 8112 may be configured, for example, to receive one of the drive elements 8172 of the handle 8170 in it. As described in more detail herein, the drive elements 8172 may be connected and / or otherwise driven by the drive system in the handle 8170. For example, each drive element 8172 may be connected and / or otherwise driven by a linear actuator of the drive system in the handle 8170, to The otorium can be made with the possibility of translational movement and supply of linear drive movement to the corresponding drive system in the end effector.

In various embodiments, the carriage 8104 may also be movable and / or shifted relative to the socket 8130 of the drive element of the connecting structure 8100. The socket 8130 of the drive element may be configured to receive, for example, one of the drive elements 8172 of the handle 8170. As shown mainly in FIG. 71, the socket 8103 may include an opening 8136, the size and / or design of which is suitable for receiving a component of the handle drive system 8170 therein. For example, as shown mainly in FIG. 67, the hole 8136 may be configured to receive a distal portion of the drive rod 8172 therein. In such embodiments, when the drive rod 8172 is secured within the hole 8136 in the socket 8130, as described in more detail herein, the socket 8130 may be able to transmit a driving force from the handle 8170 to the surgical end effector, for example, through the interaction of the drive rod 8172 and socket 8130.

As shown in FIG. 67, the drive rod 8172 may, for example, include a chamfer 8176 and a groove or recess 8174, which may facilitate interaction and / or blocking of the drive rod 8172 in the socket 8130. In various embodiments, the socket of the drive element 8130 may be secured and / or fixed, for example, inside the end effector and / or inside the connector body 8102, and the carriage 8104 can be movable and / or shifted relative to and / or in the region of the socket 8130 when the carriage 8104 slides inside the channel 8103 of the connector body 8102.

As shown mainly in FIG. 71, socket 8130 may include at least one flexible tongue 8132a, 8132b. The flexible tongue 8132a, 8132b may be displaced inwardly towards the opening 8136 and / or may include, for example, an inwardly displaceable tooth. In some embodiments, the flexible tongue 8132a, 8132b may include, for example, a tooth 8133 configured to engage with a groove 8174 in the drive rod 8172 when the drive rod 8172 is inserted into the hole 8136 of the socket 8130. For example, the chamfer 8176 of the drive rod 8172 may extend past the tooth 8133 inside the socket hole 8136 and can bend or deflect the tongue 8132 outward from the hole 8136. As the drive rod 8172 continues to enter the hole 8136 of the socket 8130, the tongue 8136 of the tongue 8132a, 8132b can interact or capture about 8174 to drive rod 8172. In such embodiments, the interaction of the tooth 8136 and troughs 8174 allows, for example, releasably hold drive rod 8172 within the socket 8130.

In various embodiments, socket 8130 may include a recess 8134 configured to insert, for example, springs 8150. In other embodiments, socket 8136 may include multiple recesses 8134, and the connecting structure 8100 may include, for example, more than one spring 8150. Moreover, in some embodiments, the socket 8130 may include more than one flexible tongue 8132a, 8132b. For example, socket 8130 may include a pair of laterally spaced reeds 8132a, 8132b. The first tongue 8132a may be located, for example, on the first side of the socket 8130, and the second tongue 8132b may be located, for example, on the second side of the socket 8130. In some embodiments, the tongues 8132a, 8132b may, for example, deviate outward from the hole 8136 for providing input to the drive rod 8172. In other embodiments, socket 8130 may, for example, not include an inwardly deflecting tongue and / or may include more than two reeds.

In various embodiments, the connecting structure 8100 may also include a latch or sleeve 8140, which can be positioned relative to the socket 8130. For example, the latch 8140 may include a hole 8142 (FIG. 72), the size and design of which is suitable for at least partially enclosing at least a portion of the socket 8130. For example, the latch 8140 may be located around the socket 8130 and may be, for example, movable relative to the reeds 8132a, 8132b of the socket 8130. In various variants of the spring 8150 can be, for example, between the section of the socket 8130 and the section of the latch 8140, so that the spring 8150 can bias the latch 8140 to the locking position of the socket (FIG. 68). For example, the spring 8150 can bias the latch 8140 into the latching position (FIG. 68), in which the latch 8140 is located so as to surround and / or limit the folding of the tongue (s) 8132a, 8132b outward.

In various embodiments, when the latch 8140 is positioned so as to limit and / or prevent the tongue (s) 8132a, 8132b from being bent outward, i.e. , in the locking position, shifting the tongue (s) 8132a, 8132b outward from the hole 8136 may be it is limited so that the tongue (s) 8132a, 8132b, for example, can block and / or otherwise prevent the entry and / or release of the drive rod 8172 relative to the hole 8136 in the socket 8130. In addition, when the trigger 8120 moves from an inactive position (FIG. . 68) in the activated position (FIG. 67 and 69), fix ator 8140 may, for example, to overcome the biasing action of the spring 8150 and can move from a locking position of the slot (FIG. 68) to the unlatched position (FIGS. 67 and 69). In the non-fixed position, the latch 8140 can be moved away from the flexible tongue (s) 8132a, 8132b so that the flexible tongue (s) 8132a, 8132b, for example, can be bent outward and the socket 8130, for example, can take the drive rod 8172.

In various embodiments, the latch 8140 may include a bulge or protrusion 8144. In addition, as shown mainly in FIG. 70, the carriage 8104 in the connector housing 8102 may include a biasing element 8108. The biasing element 8108 may include, for example, a slope or an inclined surface, which may be configured to move the protrusion 8144 and therefore the latch 8140, for example, between the first or locking position of the socket (FIG. 67 and 69) and the second or non-fixed position (FIG. 68). For example, when moving the trigger 8120 causes the carriage 8104 to move relative to the connector housing 8102 and the socket 8130, as described herein, the protrusion 8144 can slide along the inclined surface of the biasing member 8108 so that the latch 8140 will move relative to the flexible tongue 8132 of the socket 8130. B In these embodiments, activation of the trigger mechanism 8120 overcomes the biasing action of the spring 8150 and pulls the latch 8140 out of the locking position of the socket around the flexible tongue (s) 8132 of socket 8130 into the non-fixed position. In such embodiments, when the latch 8140 is pulled back, the flexible tongue (s) 8132 may be able to bend and / or interact with the drive rod 8172. In addition, when the trigger is not activated, the spring 8150 can bias the latch 8140 relative to and / or in the region of the flexible the tongue (s) 8132a, 8132b so that the folding of the tongue (s) 8132a, 8132b and, therefore, the interaction with the drive rod 8172, for example, is limited or prevented.

In some embodiments, the latch 8140 may include a pair of laterally opposing protrusions 8144, which may be in sliding interaction with laterally opposing biasing elements 8108 of the carriage 8104. In addition, in those cases in which the connecting structure 8100 connects more than one drive system between the handle 8170 and a surgical end effector, for example, a carriage 8104 may include a plurality of biasing elements 8108 and / or a plurality of pairs of biasing elements 8108. For example, each socket 8130 may include chat a pair of laterally spaced projections 8144 and the carriage 8104 may include, for example, the biasing member 8108 on each projection 8144.

As shown mainly in FIG. 68, before activating the trigger 8120 and / or after releasing the trigger 8120, the trigger 8120 may be in a distal, inactive position, the carriage 8104 may be in a raised position relative to the connector body 8102, and the latch 8140 may be in a slot-locking position. In such a configuration, the latch 8140 may, for example, prevent entry and / or interaction of the drive rod 8172 with the socket 8130. In various embodiments, the spring (s) 8150 and / or other spring and / or biasing element may, for example, bias the trigger 8120 into the inactive position, carriage 8104 - in the raised position and / or latch 8140 - in the locking position. To connect and / or attach one of the drive rods 8172 to one of the sockets 8130, as shown in FIG. 67, the trigger mechanism 8120 can be moved to the proximal, activated position, which allows, for example, to move the carriage 8104 to the lowered position, which can shift the latch 8140 to the non-fixed position. In such a configuration, the drive rod 8172, for example, may be configured to enter or receive in socket 8130.

Further, if the trigger 8120 is released, as shown in FIG. 68, for example, spring (s) 8150 can shift the trigger 8120 back to a distal, inactive position, can (shift) slide the carriage 8104 back to the raised position and can (shift) slide the latch 8140 back into the position of the locking slot. Accordingly, the drive element 8172 can be locked in cooperation with the socket 8130, since the latch 8140 can prevent the flexible tabs 8132a, 8132b from bending outward and, therefore, can, for example, secure the drive element 8172 inside the socket 8130. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 69, to disconnect the actuator 8172 from the socket 8130, the trigger 8120 can again be moved to the proximal, activated position, which can, for example, slide the carriage 8104 to the lowered position, which can move the latch 8140 to the non-locked position. In this configuration, that is, when the socket 8130 is not fixed, the drive element 8172, for example, can be removed from the socket 8130.

In various embodiments, the surgical instrument may include a drive system coupled to the engine. In some embodiments, the engine and drive system may affect various surgical functions. For example, an engine and a drive system, for example, can affect the opening and / or closing of a surgical end effector and can affect a cutting and / or starting cycle. In some embodiments, the engine and drive system may affect many distinct surgical functions. For example, opening and closing of a surgical end effector may be separate and distinct from cutting and / or releasing fasteners from a surgical end effector. In such embodiments, the drive system may include a transmission and / or gripper assembly, which, for example, can shift the drive system to interact with different output systems.

In various embodiments, a surgical instrument may include a drive system comprising a plurality of output shafts and a clutch for switching between different output shafts. In some embodiments, the output trunks may correspond to different surgical functions. For example, the first output barrel may correspond to the closing movement of the end effector, and the second output barrel may correspond to the starting movement of the end effector. In various embodiments, the drive system may be switched, for example, between the connection with the first output shaft and the second output shaft so that the surgical functions are divided, different and / or independent. For example, the closing movement of the end effector can be separated and different from the starting movement of the end effector. For example, it may be preferable to start a closing movement, and upon completion of the closing movement, start a separate starting movement. Moreover, it may be preferable to control and / or carry out independent closing movement and starting movement by means of a single drive system, which can be connected, for example, with one electric motor. In other embodiments, the first output shaft and the second output shaft may be operatively connected, and various surgical functions and / or movements may occur, for example, simultaneously and / or at least partially simultaneously.

As shown in FIG. 75-78, the surgical instrument handle 8600 may include a drive system 8602, which may include, for example, a first output drive system 8610 and a second output drive system 8620. In various embodiments, when an end effector is attached to the handle 8600, the first output drive system 8610 can connect to a first drive system in an attached end effector, and a second output drive system 8620 can connect to a second drive system in an attached end effector. The first output drive system 8610 may affect the first surgical function, such as compression of the end effector branches, and the second output drive system 8620 may affect the second surgical function, such as triggering the movement of the trigger element along the end effector. In other embodiments, the surgical functions related to the first output drive system 8610 and the second output drive system 8620 may, for example, be reversed and / or otherwise changed.

In various embodiments, the drive system 8602 may include an engine assembly, which may include an electric motor 8640 and an engine barrel 8642. The drive gear 8644 may be mounted, for example, on the engine shaft 8642, so that the motor 8640 effectes and / or affects the rotation of the drive gear 8644. In various embodiments, the first output drive system 8610 may include a first drive shaft 8612 and a first driven gear 8612 The first driven gear 8614 may be mounted on the first drive shaft 8612, for example, so that the rotation of the first driven gear 8614 affects the rotation of the first drive shaft 8612. In various embodiments, the linear actuator 8616 can may be threaded on the first drive shaft 8612, and rotation of the first drive shaft 8612 may affect, for example, linear movement of the linear actuator 8616. Moreover, in various embodiments, the second output drive system 8620 may include a second drive shaft 8622 and a second driven gear 8624. The second driven gear 8624 can be mounted on the second drive shaft 8622, for example, so that the rotation of the second driven gear 8624 affects the rotation of the second drive shaft 8622. In various embodiments, the line The actuator 8626 can be threaded on the second drive shaft 8624, and the rotation of the second drive shaft 8624 can affect, for example, the linear displacement of the linear actuator 8626.

In various embodiments, the drive system 8602 may further comprise a transmission or shift assembly 8648. The shifter assembly 8648 may be configured to shift the interaction of the drive gear 8644, for example, between the first output drive system 8610 and the second output drive system 8620. In some embodiments, the shifter assembly 8648 may include a shift gear 8652, which may, for example, be located in gear interaction with the drive gear 8644. In addition, the shift gear 8652 can be made, for example, with the possibility of shifting or moving within the range of positions, and it can remain in the gear that interaction with the drive gear 8644 when moving the shift gear 8652 within this range of positions.

For example, the shift gear 8652 may engage and / or exit the interaction with at least one of the first driven gear 8614 and / or the second driven gear 8624. In various embodiments, the shifting gear 8652 may engage in gear interaction with the second drive gear 8624 of the second the output drive system 8620. For example, in the first position (FIG. 78) of the position range, the pinion gear 8652 may be released from the second driven gear 8624, and for example in the second position (FIG. 77) of the pinion range I gear 8652 can interact with the second driven gear 8624. In cases where the shifting gear 8652 interacts with the second drive gear 8624, the shifting gear 8652 can transmit force from the drive gear 8644 to the second driven gear 8624 so that the engine 8640 can affect surgical function by, for example, a second output drive system 8620. Furthermore, in embodiments where the shift gear 8652 is released from the second driven gear 8624, the rotation of the engine 8640, for example, cannot be transmitted to the second output drive system 8620.

In various embodiments, the shift assembly 8648 may further comprise an intermediate and / or gear gear 8654. The gear gear 8642 may be configured to transmit drive force from the shift gear 8652, for example, to the first driven gear 8614. In various embodiments, the gear gear 8654 may be in gear interaction, for example, with the first driven gear 8614 so that the rotation of the gear gear 8654 is transmitted to the first driven gear 8614. In addition, in various embodiments, the shift gear Nya 8652 may enter and / or exit the interaction with the gear gear 8654. For example, in the first position (FIG. 78) of the position range, the shift gear 8652 may be released from the gear gear 8654, and for example in the second position (FIG. 77) from the position range the shift gear 8652 is released from the transmission gear 8654. In embodiments where the shift gear 8652 interacts with the transmission gear 8654, the shift gear 8652 can transmit force from the drive gear 8644 to the first driven gear 8614 through the front precision gear 8654. In such embodiments, the motor 8640 can affect the surgical function, for example, through the first output drive system 8610. In addition, in embodiments where the shift gear 8652 is released from the gear gear 8654, rotation of the motor 8640, for example, cannot be transmitted to first output drive system 8610.

In various embodiments, the transmission gear 8654 may be rotatably mounted on the second drive shaft 8622 of the second output drive system 8620. For example, the transmission gear 8654 may be rotatable relative to the second drive shaft 8622 without affecting the rotation of the second drive shaft 8622 and a second driven gear 8624 attached thereto. In various embodiments, the shift assembly 8648 may include a holder or ring 8650 that may at least partially surround the shift pole urn 8652. The holder 8650 can be located, for example, around the shift gear 8652, so that the movement of the holder 8650 can lead to the movement of the shift gear 8652.

In various embodiments, the handle 8600 and / or the shifting assembly 8648 may further include a trigger or pawl 8630. The pawl 8630 may be able to slide the holder 8650 and / or the pinion gear 8652 within a range of positions. For example, the dog 8630 may be a trigger extending from the handle 8600 and may cooperate with the holder 8650 and / or the shift gear 8652. In various embodiments, the holder 8650 may include a pin 8656, which may extend from the holder 8640 into the hole 8638 ( FIG. 75) in the dog 8630. For example, the dog 8630 may include a shoulder 8632 and / or a pair of shoulders 8632 connected to the axis of rotation 8634 on the handle 8600. The dog 8630 may, for example, rotate around the axis of rotation 8634, and the rotation of the shoulder ( her) 8632 can lead to the movement of pcs the yoke 8656 of the holder 8560. The movement of the holder 8650 allows the shift gear 8652 to be shifted, for example, between the first position (FIG. 78) and the second position (FIG. 77).

In various embodiments, the movement of the holder 8650 may be limited so that the shift gear 8652 will move along the longitudinal axis over a range of positions. In addition, the rotation stroke and / or the range of movement of the dog 8630 may, for example, be fixed and / or limited so that the shift gear 8652 will remain within the range of positions during the rotation of the dog 8630. Moreover, the hole 8638 (FIG. 75 ) in the dog 8630 can be made and / or designed in such a way as to leave and / or hold the shifting gear 8652 within the range of positions and / or in alignment, for example, with the second driven gear 8624 and / or gear gear 8654. In various cases x handle 8600 may include a spring or other biasing mechanism for biasing the shearing gear 8652 in a first or second position. In some embodiments, the grip 8600 may include a two steady state restriction mechanism for holding the shift gear 8652 in a first position or a second position. In a situation where the shift gear 8652 is between the first and second positions, this restrictive mechanism with two stable states may be dynamically unstable and may act on the shift gear 8652, translating it into the first position or in the second position. In an alternative embodiment, the shift gear 8652 may shift to an intermediate position in which the shift gear 8652 may, for example, simultaneously interact with the first output drive system 8610 and the second output drive system 8620. As an addition or alternative, the handle 8600 may include a lock and / or stopper for holding the shift gear 8652, for example, in one of the first or second positions.

The surgical instrument may include a rotatable drive shaft configured to actuate the closing actuator and the trigger actuator of the surgical instrument. As shown in FIG. 79-84, a surgical instrument 10000 may include a rotatable drive shaft 10020, a closing drive 10030 and a trigger actuator 10040. As will be described in more detail below, the drive shaft 10020 may include a first thread 10024 configured to actuate the closing actuator 10030, and a second thread 10026 configured to actuate the trigger actuator 10040. In various cases, the tool 10000 may be, for example, a circular stapling tool.

Surgical instrument 10000 may comprise a frame 10002 and means for generating rotational movements. In some embodiments, rotational movement can be created, for example, by a hand-crank, and in various other embodiments, rotational movement can be created by an electric motor. In any case, the generated rotational movement may be transmitted to the rotational input shaft 10010. The input shaft 10010 may include a proximal bearing portion 10011 and a distal bearing portion 10013 that are rotatably held by the frame 10002. In various embodiments, the proximal bearing portion 10011 and / or the distal bearing portion 10013 can be held directly by the frame 10002, while in some embodiments the proximal bearing portion 10011 and / or the distal bearing portion 10013 m may include a bearing located between the input shaft 10010 and the frame 10002. The input shaft 10010 may further include a gear 10012 that is mounted and / or secured with a key on the input shaft 10010 so that when the input shaft 10010 rotates in direction A (FIG. .79), the gear 10012 also rotates in the direction A. Accordingly, when the input shaft 10010 rotates in the second direction, that is, the direction A '(FIG. 82), the gear 10012 also pivots in the direction A '.

As shown primarily in FIG. 79 and 80, the drive shaft 10020 may include a proximal end 10021 and a distal end 10023. The proximal end 10021 and the distal end 10023 can be rotatably held by the frame 10002. In various embodiments, the proximal end 10021 and / or the distal end 10023 can be held directly by the frame 10002, while in some embodiments, the proximal end 10021 and / or the distal end 10023 may include a bearing located between the drive shaft 10020 and the frame 10002. The gear 10022 may be mounted and / or secured with a key on the 10021 maximum DUTY end of the drive shaft 10020. The pinion 10022 is in conjunction with toothed gear 10012 so that when the input shaft 10010 is rotated in the direction A, drive shaft 10020 is rotated in the direction B. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 81, when the input shaft 10010 rotates in the direction A ', the drive shaft 10020 rotates in the direction B'.

As shown in FIG. 79, the closure drive system 10030 may include a closure pin 10032 cooperating with a first thread 10024 of the drive shaft 10020. The closure drive system 10030 may further comprise a closure member 10033 that is movable. A cover pin 10032 is located inside the hole formed at the proximal end of the cover element 10033. The cover pin 10032 may include a first end located inside the groove formed by the first thread 10024. When the drive shaft 10020 is rotated, the side wall of the groove may come into contact with the first end of the cover the pin 10032 and to displace the cover pin 10032 proximal or distal depending on the direction of rotation of the drive shaft 10020. For example, when the drive shaft 10020 is rotated in the direction B (FIG. 79), the closure pin 10032 can be displaced or progressively moved distally, as indicated in direction D. Accordingly, when the drive shaft 10020 is rotated in the direction B ′ (FIG. 82), the closure pin 10032 can be displaced or translationally move proximally, as indicated in the direction P. The closure pin 10032 can be tightly received in the hole formed in the closure element 10033 so that the offset or translational movement of the closure pin 10032 is communicated to the closure element 10033. The reader should understand that the closing pin 10032 and the closing element 10033 are limited in their ability to rotate relative to the frame 10002 so that the rotation of the drive shaft 10020 is translated into translational movement of the closing pin 10032 and the closing element 10033.

As predominantly shown in FIG. 80, the first thread 10024 runs along the first length 10025 of the drive shaft 10020. In some cases, the first thread 10024 may extend along the entire length of the drive shaft 10020, while in other circumstances, the first thread 10024 may extend along a portion that is shorter than the entire length of the drive shaft the shaft 10020. The first thread 10024 may include a proximal portion adjacent to the proximal end 10021 of the drive shaft 10020, and a distal portion adjacent to the distal end 10023 of the drive shaft 10020. When the cover pin 10032 is in the distal a first thread portion 10024, as shown in FIG. 81, the closure member 10033 may position the abutment of the surgical instrument 10000 in an open position. When the drive shaft 10020 is rotated in the direction B ', the closure pin 10032 can progressively move until the closure pin 10032 reaches the proximal portion of the first thread 10024, as shown in FIG. 82. When moving the closure pin 10032, the proximal closure pin 10032 can pull the closure element 10033 and the stop proximal. When the closure pin 10032 reaches the proximal portion of the first thread 10024, the emphasis may be in the fully closed position.

In addition to the above, the closing actuator 10030 may be actuated to move the abutment of the surgical instrument 10000 to a suitable position relative to the staple cartridge. In various embodiments, a surgical instrument 10000 may include an actuator that can be actuated in a first direction to rotate an input shaft 10010 in a direction A and a drive shaft 10020 in a direction B, and in a second direction to rotate an input shaft 10010 in a direction A ′ and drive shaft 10020 in direction B '. In various embodiments, the surgical instrument 10000 may include an actuator configured to rotate the input shaft 10010 in the direction A and a drive shaft 10020 in the direction B when driven, and a second actuator configured to rotate the input shaft 10010 in the direction A 'and the drive shaft 10020 in the direction B' when driving. In any case, the user of the surgical instrument 10000 can, as necessary, move the emphasis of the surgical instrument 10000 to and from the cassette with brackets to obtain the desired clearance between the stop and the cassette with brackets. Such a desired clearance may or may not be created when the emphasis is in the fully closed position.

In addition to the above, the surgical instrument 10000 may include a grip configured to receive and hold the drive pin 10032 with the ability to release upon transition of the closure system 10030 to a fully closed configuration. As shown primarily in FIG. 81 and 82, a surgical instrument 10000 may include a grab bar 10073 comprising a grab hole 10077 formed therein. When the drive pin 10032 extends, the proximal drive pin 10032 can align with the grip hole 10077, and then at least partially fit into it. The grip pin 10032 can move toward the grip bolt 10073 by a spring 10035 located between the closure member 10033 and the annular head 10037 extending around the grip pin 10032. When the grip pin 10032 is distally relative to the grip hole 10077, the spring 10035 can bias the drive pin 10032 to the grip bolt 10073. When moving the gripping pin 10032 proximally by turning the drive screw 10020 and aligning it with the gripping hole 10077, the spring 10035 can move the drive shaft tift 10032 up into the grip hole 10077. The drive pin 10032 can move upward by means of a spring 10035 until the head of the drive pin 10032 comes into contact with the pick bolt 10073. In particular, moving the drive pin 10032 to the grip hole 10077 can release the drive the pin 10032 from the functional interaction with the first thread 10024. Thus, the closing system 10030 can be deactivated when the drive pin 10032 reaches the gripping hole 10077 so that upon subsequent rotation those driveshaft 10020 does not move the drive pin 10032, 10033 closing element and the abutment, which are in functional interaction with it, at least as long as the drive pin 10032 is not re-enter into engagement with the first threaded 10024, as further described below.

As mentioned above, the entry of the drive pin 10032 into the gripping hole 10077 of the gripping bolt 10073 may mean the end of the closing stroke of the closing system 10030 and the fully closed stop position. In various embodiments, the gripping bolt 10073 may not be movable relative to the frame 10002, and the gripping hole 10077 may define the boundaries of the stationary position. In other embodiments, the gripping bolt 10073 may be movable relative to the frame 10002. In such embodiments, the final, closed position of the abutment will depend on the position of the gripping hole 10077. Thus, the clearance between the abutment and the cassette with brackets of a surgical instrument 10000 will depend on the position of the gripping holes 10077. As essentially shown in FIG. 79, the surgical instrument 10000 may further comprise a clearance adjustment system 10070 configured to move the gripper bolt 10073. The clearance adjustment system 10070 may include a rotary handle 10072 and a drive gear 10071 cooperating with the rotary handle 10072. The gripper bolt 10073 may include a rail 10075 passing from it and containing many teeth. The drive gear 10071 has a gear interaction with the rail 10075 so that when the handle 10072 is turned in the first direction, the rail 10075 can push the pickup bolt 10073 distally, and when the handle 10072 is turned in the second direction opposite to the first direction, the rail 10075 can push the pickup bolt 10073 proximally. When moving the gripping bolt 10073, the distally gripping hole 10077 can be positioned so that a larger gap is formed between the stop and the cassette with the brackets when the closing drive 10030 is in the fully closed position. When the gripper bolt 10073 is moved, the proximal gripper hole 10077 can be positioned so that a smaller gap is formed between the stop and the cassette with the brackets when the closing drive 10030 is in the fully closed position. In various embodiments, the gripping hole 10077 may be configured to fit within a position range capable of accommodating a range of distances between the abutment and the cassette with staples of a surgical instrument 10000.

In various embodiments, the clearance adjustment system 10070 may include a handle locking member configured to release the handle 10072 in place. For example, the frame 10002 may include a locking protrusion 10004 extending from it and which can be received in one or more locking holes 10074 formed in the handle 10072. The locking holes 10074 may be located along an annular path. Each locking hole 10074 may correspond to a predetermined position 10030 of the closing actuator and a predetermined clearance distance between the stop and the cassette with the brackets of the surgical instrument 10000. For example, when the locking protrusion 10004 is located in the first locking hole 10074, the closing actuator 10030 is held in the first predetermined position and, accordingly, the stop is held at the first specified distance from the cassette with brackets. To move the handle 10072 to a second predetermined position, the handle 10072 can be lifted from the frame 10002 so that the locking protrusion 10004 will no longer be located in the first locking hole 10074, rotate with the rail 10075 and the locking bolt 10073, and then move to the frame 10002 so that the locking the protrusion 10004 enters the second locking hole 10074 formed in the handle 10072. When the locking protrusion 10004 is located in the second locking hole 10074, the closing actuator 10030 can be held in the second predetermined position, and accordingly Accordingly, the emphasis can be held at a second predetermined distance from the cartridge with brackets different from the first predetermined distance. To move the handle 10072 to a third predetermined position, the handle 10072 can be lifted from the frame 10002 so that the locking protrusion 10004 will no longer be located in the first or second locking hole 10074, rotate with the rail 10075 and the catch bolt 10073, and then move to the frame 10002 so that that the locking protrusion 10004 enters the third locking hole 10074 formed in the handle 10072. When the locking protrusion 10004 is located in the third locking hole 10074, the closing actuator 10030 can be held in the third predetermined position and, and accordingly the emphasis is held at a third predetermined distance from the cartridge with brackets different from the first and second predetermined distances. The clearance adjustment system 10070 may further include a biasing member configured to bias the handle 10072 to the frame 10002. For example, the clearance adjustment system 10070 may include a spring 10076 located between the housing 10002 and the drive gear 10071, for example, configured to bias the locking hole 10074 in cooperation with the locking protrusion 10004.

In certain embodiments, the user of the surgical instrument 10000 can determine the position of the closure system 10030 by observing the position of the abutment. However, in some cases, the emphasis cannot be seen within the surgical field. As predominantly shown in FIG. 79, the surgical instrument 10000 may further comprise an abutment position indicating system 10050 configured to indicate an abutment position. The stop position indicating system 10050 may include a window 10058 formed in the frame 10002 and a pivot element 10051 that can be seen through the window 10058. The pivot element 10051 may include a hinge 10052 rotatably mounted on the frame 10002, the drive end 10054 and a display end 10056. The pivoting element 10051 may be movable between a first position (FIG. 81), indicating that the stop is in a fully open position, a second position (FIG. 82), indicating that the stop isthe fully closed position, and a range of positions between a first position and a second position, reflecting a number of provisions will go. The closure system 10030 may be configured to come into contact with the drive end 10054 of the pivot member 10051 to move the pivot member 10051. When the drive pin 10032 is moved proximally by the drive shaft 10020, as predominantly shown in FIG. 82, the drive pin 10032 can pull the closure element 10033 proximally so that the collar 10036 formed on the closure element 10033 can interact with the drive end 10054 of the rotary element 10051 and rotate the rotary element 10051 around the hinge 10052. Rotating the rotary element 10051 causes the display end 10056 to move within window 10058, indicating the position of the stop. To facilitate observation, the frame 10002 and / or window 10058 may include one or more boundary marks 10059, which may indicate a stop position. For example, by combining the display end 10056 of the pivoting element 10051 with a proximal boundary mark 10059 (FIG. 81), the user can determine that the stop is in the open position, and when aligning the display end 10056 with the distal border mark 10059 (FIG. 82), the user can determine that the emphasis is in the closed position. If the display end 10056 is located between the proximal and distal boundary marks 10059, the user can assume that the stop is in the position between the open position and the closed position. Additional boundary marks 10059 between the proximal and distal boundary marks 10059 may be used to indicate additional stop positions. By moving the closure member 10033 distally to open the stop (FIG. 84), the pivoting member 10051 can be rotated back to the first position and re-aligned with the proximal boundary mark 10059. The position indicating system 10050 may further include a biasing member, for example, such as a spring, configured to bias the pivot member 10051 to a first position.

As mentioned above, the closing system 10030 of the surgical instrument 10000 can be, when actuated, to position the stop of the surgical instrument 10000 relative to the cassette with brackets. During operation of the closing system 10030, the starting system 10040 may not work. The starter system 10040 can be made without the possibility of functional interaction with the drive barrel 10020 until then, until the closing actuator 10030 reaches a fully closed position. The surgical instrument 10000 may include a switch, for example, such as a switch 10060, configured to switch the surgical instrument between the stop close mode and the staple eject mode. The closing actuator 10030 may further include a switching pin 10031 extending from the proximal end of the closing element 10033. Comparing FIG. 81 and 82, the reader will understand that the switching pin 10031 interacts with the switch 10060 by extending the closing pin 10032 proximally to close the stop. The switch 10060 may be rotatably mounted on the frame 10002 around the hinge 10062 and may include one or more arms 10064 extending from it. The switch pin 10031 can come into contact with the arms 10064 and rotate the switch 10060 around the hinge 10062 when the drive pin 10032 reaches the fully closed position. The switch 10060 may further comprise a shoulder 10066 extending from it and configured to push the starting nut 10042 of the starting actuator 10040 in functional interaction with the drive shaft 10020, while the switch 10060 is rotated around the hinge 10062. More specifically, in at least one case, the shoulder 10066 may be configured to distally move the push rod 10044, which in turn pushes the starting nut 10042 onto the second thread 10026. At this point, the drive pin 10032 and the closing system 10030 may not interact s with the first threaded through the gripping opening 10024 10077 as described above, and pad nut 10042 and 10040 starting system may enter into engagement with the second threaded 10026.

In addition to the above, the starting nut 10042 may comprise a threaded hole 10041 formed therein, which may engage in threaded engagement with the second thread 10026. During the actuation of the closing actuator 10030, in addition to the above, the starting nut 10042 may be located proximally relative to the second thread 10026 so that the threaded hole 10041 is not in threaded interaction with the second thread 10026. In such circumstances, the starting nut 10042 may remain unused during rotation and the drive shaft 10020 in order to actuate the closing system 10030. When the starter nut 10042 is displaced distally, in addition to the above, the threaded hole 10041 can engage in threaded interaction with the second thread 10026. After the start nut 10042 has entered into threaded interaction with the second thread 10026 rotation of the drive shaft 10020 in the direction B '(FIG. 82) causes the displacement of the start nut 10042 distally. The starter nut 10042 may include one or more anti-rotational elements, such as, for example, flanges 10043, which can engage slidingly with the frame 10002 to prevent the starter nut 10042 from turning with the drive barrel 10020. The starter drive 10040 may further include a starter an element connected to the starter nut 10042, which can be distally pushed through the starter nut 10042. The starter element can be configured to push the brackets out of the cassette with brackets. When the starting nut 10042 reaches the distal end of the second thread 10026, the starting nut 10042 can be released from threaded interaction with the second thread 10026, and the additional rotation of the drive shaft 10020 in the direction B 'may no longer push forward the starting nut 10042.

As predominantly shown in FIG. 82 and 83, the surgical instrument 10000 may further comprise a reverse actuator 10047 located at the distal end of the second thread 10026. The trigger nut 10042 may be configured to come into contact with the reverse actuator 10047 and displace the reverse actuator 10047 distally when when the starting nut 10042 reaches the distal end of the second thread 10026. A biasing element, such as a spring 10048, may be located between the actuator 10047 deleterious action and the frame 10002 and can be configured to prevent distal movement of actuator 10047 reverse action. The distal movement of the reverse actuator 10047 may cause compression of the spring 10048, as shown in FIG. 83, and apply a proximal biasing force to the starting nut 10042. When the drive shaft 10020 is rotated in direction B, the proximal biasing force applied to the starting nut 10042 allows the threaded hole 10041 of the starting nut 10042 to re-engage with the second thread 10026, and the starting nut 10042 can move proximally, as shown in FIG. 84. Proximal movement of the trigger nut 10042 can move the trigger element proximally. During proximal movement, the starting nut 10042 can bias the push rod 10044 so that the push rod 10044 makes contact with the lever 10066 of the switch 10060 and turns the switch 10060 in the opposite direction, back to the off position. At this point, the starting nut 10042 is released from threaded interaction with the second thread 10026, and subsequent rotation of the drive shaft 10020 in direction B does not cause further displacement of the starting nut 10042 proximally. At this point, the starting nut 10042 returns to the idle position.

When the switch 10060 is turned back to its original position, in addition to the above, the shoulders 10064 of the switch 10060 can push the switching pin 10031 and the closing element 10033 distally. Distal movement of the switch pin 10031 and the closure member 10033 can bias the drive pin 10032 from the grip hole 10077 formed in the grip bolt 10073. When the drive pin 10032 leaves the grip hole 10077, the drive pin 10032 can move downward against the biasing force of the spring 10035, sliding under the gripper bolt 10073. Moving the drive pin 10032 down may cause the drive pin 10032 to re-engage with the first thread 10024. Subsequent rotation of the drive shaft 100 20, in direction B, it will move the drive pin 10032 and the closure 10033 distally with the stop of the surgical instrument 10000 open. At this point, the surgical instrument 10000 will be retuned for later use. In various embodiments, the cassette with brackets can be replaced and / or reloaded, and the surgical instrument 10000 can be reused.

The reader should understand from the foregoing that the drive screw 10020 can bias the drive pin 10032 in order to actuate the closing drive 10030 and the trigger nut 10042 to drive the trigger drive 10040. In addition to the above, the drive screw 10020 can bias the drive pin 10032 along the first length 10025 of the drive screw 10020. Similarly, the drive screw 10020 may bias the start nut 10042 along the second length 10027 of the drive screw 10020. The first length 10025 may form a closing stroke of the closing system 10030, and second The length 10027 may form the start cycle of the start cycle 10040. The first length 10025 may be longer than the second length 10027, although in some embodiments the second length 10027 may be longer than the first length 10025. During use, the start nut 10042 may pass the locking pin 10032 For example, when moving the locking pin 10032 proximally to close the stop, the starting nut 10042 may pass the closing pin 10032 when the starting nut 10042 is in the idle position. Similarly, the starting nut 10042, while in the idle position, can pass the closure pin 10032 while moving the closure pin 10032 distally to open the stop. To facilitate this relative movement, the starting nut 10042 may include an opening, such as, for example, a through groove 10046 formed therein, which can pass the locking pin 10032 through itself when moving the closing pin 10032 relative to the starting nut 10042. Such an opening formed in the starting the nut 10042 also allows the starter nut 10042 to slide over the cover pin 10032 in various other embodiments.

In addition to the above, the first length 10025 and the second length 10027 may at least partially overlap one another. Moreover, the first thread 10024 and the second thread 10026 can at least partially overlap each other. The first thread 10024 and the second thread 10026 can be formed on the same portion of the drive screw 10020. The first thread 10024 and the second thread 10026 can differ significantly so that the locking pin 10032 cannot follow the second thread 10026, and so that the starting nut 10042 cannot follow the first thread 10024. For example, the first thread 10024 may include a first thread pitch, and the second thread 10026 may include a second thread pitch different from the first thread pitch. The pitch of the first thread of the first thread 10024 may or may not be constant. If the first thread pitch is constant, the closing pin 10032 and the stop functional interacting with the first thread 10024 will move at a constant speed throughout the closing cycle at a given rotation speed of the drive shaft 10020. If the first thread pitch is not constant, the closing pin 10032 and the stop will move at different speeds during the closing cycle at a given rotation speed of the drive shaft 10020. For example, the distal portion of the first thread 10024 may include ag threads are larger than the thread pitch of the proximal portion of the first thread 10024. In such circumstances, the stop will move quickly from the open position and much slower when approaching the closed position at a given rotation speed of the drive shaft 10020. This configuration will ensure that the stop moves quickly to the position close to tissue located between the stop and the cassette with staples, and then, after the stop comes into contact with the fabric, slow movement to reduce the possibility of excessive compression tissue. In various other embodiments, the distal portion of the first thread 10024 may include a thread pitch smaller than the thread pitch of the proximal portion of the first thread 10024. In any case, the thread pitch may vary between the ends of the first thread 10024. Such a change may be linear and / or nonlinear.

In addition to the above, the second thread pitch of the second thread 10026 may or may not be constant. If the second thread pitch is constant, the starting nut 10042 and the starting element, which interact with the second thread 10026, will move at a constant speed throughout the closing cycle at a given rotation speed of the drive shaft 10020. If the second thread pitch is not constant , the starting nut 10042 and the starting element will move at different speeds during the starting cycle at a given rotation speed of the drive shaft 10020. For example, the distal portion of the second thread 10026 may include a thread pitch smaller than the thread pitch of the proximal portion of the second thread 10026. In such circumstances, the trigger element will move slower at the end of the trigger cycle at a given rotation speed of the drive shaft 10020. This configuration will slow down the trigger element when it reaches the final stage of the formation method staples. Moreover, this configuration allows you to generate a greater moment at the end of the starting cycle, which corresponds to the end of the method of forming brackets. In various other embodiments, the distal portion of the second thread 10026 may include a larger thread pitch than the thread pitch of the proximal portion of the second thread 10026. In any case, the thread pitch may vary between the ends of the second thread 10026. Such a change may be linear and / or nonlinear.

As shown in FIG. 86-93, a surgical instrument 10500 may include a barrel 10504 and an end effector 10505. The end effector 10505 may include a cassette with brackets 10506 and an emphasis 10508 that is movable. Surgical instrument 10500 may include a closure drive, including a closure member operable to engage with the abutment 10504, and a trigger actuator, including a trigger, configured to accommodate staples from cassette 10506. Surgical instrument 10500 may include means for generating rotational movement, such as, for example, a manual crank and / or an electric motor. Rotational movement may be transmitted to input shaft 10510. Surgical instrument 10500 may include a transmission 10502 configured to selectively transmit rotation of input shaft 10510 to a closing drive and a starting drive, as further described below.

The input shaft 10510 may include an input gear 10512 mounted thereon and / or secured with a key and rotating together with the input shaft 10510. The input shaft 10510 may be rotatably held by the frame of the surgical instrument 10500 by the proximal end 10511 and the distal end 10519. The input gear 10512 may be in gear engagement with an intermediate gear 10522 mounted on an intermediate shaft 10520 and / or secured with a key. Thus, when the input shaft 10510 and the input gear 10512 are rotated in the direction A (FIG. 89), the intermediate shaft 10520 and the intermediate gear 10522 are rotated in the direction B (FIG. 89). Similar to the above, the intermediate barrel 10520 can be rotatably held by the frame of the surgical instrument through the proximal end 10521 and the distal end 10529. The intermediate barrel 10520 may further include a threaded portion 10524, which may be in threaded engagement with the shift latch 10526. As predominantly shown in FIG. 87, the shear latch 10526 may include one or more threaded holes 10527 that are threadedly engaged with the threaded portion 10524. When the intermediate shaft 10520 is rotated in direction B, as shown primarily in FIG. 89, the intermediate barrel 10520 may bias the shifter latch 10526 proximally.

In addition to the above, the shift latch 10526 may include a gear groove 10528 formed therein. The input shaft 10510 may further include a sliding gear 10516 mounted on it with the possibility of sliding and located in the groove 10528 of the gear. When moving the shift lock 10526 proximally by the intermediate shaft 10520, as described above, the shift lock 10526 can push the sliding gear 10516 proximally along the engaged portion 10514 of the input shaft. As predominantly shown in FIG. 87, the sliding gear 10516 may include an aperture 10517 formed therein and including, for example, one or more flat surfaces aligned with corresponding flat surfaces on an engaged portion 10514 of the input shaft. The flat surfaces of the input shaft bore 10517 and the engagement portion 10514 of the input shaft can allow the sliding gear 10516 to slide longitudinally along the input shaft 10510 and, in addition, interact to transmit rotary movement from the sliding gear 10516 to the drive shaft 10510 and vice versa. As will be described in more detail below, the shifter latch 10526 can move the sliding gear 10516 through the first position range in which the sliding gear 10516 interacts with the closing barrel 10530, the second position range in which the sliding gear 10516 interacts with the starting barrel 10540, and the neutral position or a range of neutral positions between the first range and the second range of positions, in which the sliding gear 10516 does not interact with either the closing barrel 10530 or the launch barrel 10540.

In addition to the above, in FIG. 85 depicts a stop 10508 of end effector 10505 in a fully closed position and a starting pulley 10548 in an inactive position. In FIG. 86 shows the transmission 10502 in a configuration corresponding to the configuration of the end effector 10505 shown in FIG. 85. More specifically, the sliding gear 10516 is in the neutral or idle position and does not interact functionally with the closing barrel 10530 of the closing drive or the starting barrel 10540 of the starting drive. When the sliding gear 10516 is in the neutral position, the sliding gear 10516 is located between the closing gear 10532 mounted on and / or coupled to the locking barrel 10530 and the starting gear 10542 mounted on and / or coupled to the starting barrel 10540. Moreover, the sliding gear 10516 does not interact with the closing gear 10532 or the starting gear 10542 when the sliding gear 10516 is in the idle position. To move the stop 10508 to the open position and / or release the stop 10508 from the end effector 10505, as shown in FIG. 88, the input shaft 10510 can rotate in the direction A, as shown in FIG. 89. As indicated above, turning the input shaft 10510 in the direction A can rotate the countershaft 10520 in the direction B and move the shifter latch 10526 proximally. When moving the shift lock 10526 proximally, the shift lock 10526 engages the sliding gear 10516 in functional interaction with the closing gear 10532. At this point, the continued rotation of the input shaft 10510 in the direction A can be transmitted to the closing shaft 10530 through the gear interaction of the sliding gear 10516 and the closing gear 10532. With the gear the interaction of the sliding gear 10516 with the closing gear 10532, the rotation of the input shaft 10510 in the direction A will rotate the output shaft 10530 in the direction C, As illustrated in FIG. 89. The closing actuator may further include a closing nut 10536 containing a threaded hole 10537 formed therein, which is in threaded engagement with the threaded portion 10534 of the closure barrel 10530. The closing nut 10536 may include one or more anti-rotation elements cooperating with sliding with the frame of the surgical instrument, which, for example, can prevent the closing nut 10536 from rotating together with the closing barrel 10530 so that the rotational movement of the barrel closing Experiments 10530 may translate into longitudinal movement of the closing nut 10536. The closing system may further include a closing member 10538 extending from the closing nut 10536, which may cooperate with the stop 10508. When the closing barrel 10530 is rotated in direction C, as shown in FIG. 89, the closing nut 10536 and the closing element 10538 can be extended distally, moving the stop 10508 to the open position.

In addition to the above, in FIG. 89, transmission 10502 is shown in a closing configuration, that is, in a configuration in which an emphasis 10508 can open and close. When the sliding gear 10516 is engaged with the cover gear 10532, the input shaft 10510 will directly drive the closure shaft 10530. At the same time, the input shaft 10510 will directly drive the intermediate shaft 10520 due to the gear interaction between the input gear 10512 and the intermediate gear 10522. In addition, in the case of gear interaction of the sliding gear 10516 with the closing gear 10532, the sliding gear 10516 has no gear interaction with the starting gear 10542 and, as such, the input gear The output shaft 10510 will not actuate the launch barrel 10540 when the transmission 10502 is in the closing configuration.

After moving the stop 10508 to the open position and / or detaching from the closure member 10538, in addition to the above, the fabric may be located between the stop 10508 and the cassette with brackets 10506. Then, as shown in FIG. 90 and 91, the stop 10508 can be moved to the closed position by rotating the input shaft 10510 in the opposite direction, that is, in the direction A ', while the closing barrel 10530 will rotate in the opposite direction, that is, in the direction C', moving the closing nut 10536, the closing element 10538 and the stop 10508 proximally. The input shaft 10510 will also rotate the intermediate shaft 10520 in the opposite direction, that is, in the direction B ', while the input shaft 10510 is rotated in the direction A'. When the countershaft 10520 is rotated in the direction B ', countershaft 10520 biases the shifter latch 10526 and the sliding gear 10516 distally. The shifter latch 10526 can push the sliding gear 10516 distally until the sliding gear 10516 is released from the gearing with the closure gear 10532 and the sliding gear 10516 returns to the idle position. An additional rotation of the intermediate shaft 10520 in the direction B 'causes the shifter latch 10526 to displace the sliding gear 10516 distally before the sliding gear 10516 is engaged in gear interaction with the starting gear 10542. At this point, as shown in FIG. 92 and 93, the input shaft 10510 can directly drive the launch barrel 10540. Then, the input shaft 10510 can rotate the launch barrel 10540 in the direction D 'while the input shaft 10510 rotates in the direction A'. The starter system may further comprise a starter nut 10546, including a threaded hole 10547, which is in threaded engagement with the threaded portion 10544 of the closure barrel 10540. When the starter barrel 10410 rotates in the direction A ', the starter barrel 10540 can extend the starter nut 10546 distally. The trigger nut 10546 may include one or more anti-rotation elements that slide together with the frame of the surgical instrument so that the trigger nut 10546 does not rotate with the trigger barrel 10540, and so that the rotational movement of the trigger barrel 10540 can translate into longitudinal movement of the trigger nuts 10546. The trigger actuator may further include a trigger element 10548 extending from the trigger nut 10546 and extend distally to push the brackets out of the cartridge with brackets 10 506. Throughout the entire starting cycle of the starting system, the shifter latch 10526 continuously extends the sliding gear 10516 distally. The start cycle can be completed when the shift lock 10526 extends the sliding gear 10516 distally to a point where the sliding gear 10516 is no longer threadedly engaged with the start shaft 10542. At this point, the start element 10548 can be in a fully activated position.

In addition to the above, in FIG. 93 shows a transmission 10502 in a starting configuration, that is, in a configuration in which the starting element 10548 can be extended and retracted. When the sliding gear 10516 is engaged in gearing with the starting gear 10542, the input shaft 10510 will directly drive the starting shaft 10540. At the same time, the input shaft 10510 will directly drive the intermediate shaft 10520 due to the gear interaction between the input gear 10512 and the intermediate gear 10522. In addition, when gear engagement of the sliding gear 10516 with the starting gear 10542, the sliding gear 10516 has no gear interaction with the closing gear 10532 and, therefore, input nd shaft 10510 will not actuate the barrel closure 10530, 10502 when the transmission is in the starting configuration.

To retract the trigger element 10548, the input shaft 10510 can be rotated in the direction A, turning the intermediate shaft 10520 in the direction B, displacing the shifter latch 10526 proximally and reintroducing the sliding gear 10516 into interaction with the starting gear 10542. At this point, the input shaft 10510 is continuously rotated in the direction A will rotate the trigger barrel 10540 in the opposite direction to D ', the offset of the trigger nut 10546 is proximal and retract the trigger element 10548. When turning the trigger gear 10542, Moving gear shifter 10526 10516 retainer continues to pull the sliding gear 10516 proximally to release the sliding pinion gear interaction of 10516 with starter gear 10542 and 10516 achieve sliding gear idling position. At this point, a continuous rotation of the input shaft 10510 in direction A will continue to bias the shifter latch 10526 and the sliding gear 10516 proximally and re-engage the sliding gear 10516 with the closing gear 10532 to re-open the stop 10508.

In FIG. 94-98 show a surgical instrument 11010 configured to stitch and / or dissect tissue. Surgical instrument 11010 may include a pistol grip 11015. The grip 11015 includes a first grip portion 11020 defining a longitudinal axis 11030 from which branches 11070 and 11090 can extend. The grip 11015 includes a second grip portion, that is, a grip 11040 of the grip, forming an axis 11050 of the second section. The axis 11050 of the second portion forms an angle 11060 with the longitudinal axis 11030. In various embodiments, the angle 11060 may be any suitable angle, such as, for example, approximately equal to 120 degrees. The jaw 11070 may include a cassette channel including an opening configured to be retrieved to receive a cassette 11080 with staples. The cassette 11080 with brackets may include a plurality of staples stored with the possibility of extraction in the cavities for brackets located in at least two longitudinal rows, one on each side of the channel along which the scalpel is moved to dissect tissue, as described in detail below. In at least one case, three longitudinal rows of staple cavities can be located on the first side of the scalpel channel, while three longitudinal rows of staple cavities can be located on the second side of the scalpel channel. The jaw 11090 may include an emphasis configured to rotate to a position opposite and coaxial with the cassette 11080 with brackets so that the recesses formed in the emphasis 11090 can receive and form staples ejected from the cassette 11080 with brackets. In FIG. 98 shows the emphasis 11090 in the open position, and in FIG. 94 shows the stop 11090 in the closed position. Although not shown, embodiments are provided in which the jaw including the cassette 11080 with brackets is rotatable relative to the stop 11090. In any case, as will be described in more detail below, the handle 11015 may further include a closing button 11065 (FIG. 98), configured to actuate a closing system that moves the stop 11090 between open and closed positions, and a start button 11055, configured to act on the starting system, which draws lkivaet staples from the cartridge 11080 staples. The closing button 11065 can be located and designed on the handle 11015, for example, so that the user can easily reach it with the thumb of the hand holding the handle 11015, while the start button 11055 can be located and designed so that the user can easily reach it with the index finger of the hand holding the handle 11015.

In addition to the above, the emphasis 11090 can be moved to and from the cassette 11080 with brackets during use. In various embodiments, the closing button 11065 may include a bi-directional switch. By pressing the closing button 11065 in the first direction, the closing system of the surgical instrument 11010 can move the stop 11090 to the cassette 11080 with brackets, and by pressing the closing button 11065 in the second direction, the closing system can move the stop 11090 from the cassette 11080 with brackets. As predominantly shown in FIG. 95 and 97, the closure system may include a closure motor 11110 configured to move the stop 11090. The closure engine 11110 may include a closing barrel 11130 extending therefrom, rotatable to which a first closure gear 11140 may be attached. The closure motor 11110 can rotate the closure barrel 11130, and the closure barrel 11130 can rotate the first closure gear 11140. The first closure gear 11140 may be in gear engagement with the intermediate gear stubble 11150, which in turn may be in conjunction with the toothed driving gear 11160 closing leadscrew. The closing screw drive gear 11160 is attached to the closing screw 11170. When the first closing gear 11140 is rotated by the closing barrel 11130, the first closing gear 11140 can rotate the intermediate gear 11150, the intermediate gear 11150 can rotate the locking gear 11160 of the closing rotor and the driving gear 11160 the lead screw can turn the closing lead screw 11170.

As predominantly shown in FIG. 97, a closing barrel 11130, a first closing gear 11140, an intermediate gear 11150, and a closing screw drive gear 11160 may be rotatably held on an engine lock 11125 secured within the handle portion 11120. The closing lead screw 11170 may include a first end that is also rotatably held on the engine lock 11125 and / or a second end that is rotatably held on the handle housing 11015. The closing lead screw 11170 may further comprise a threaded portion between the first end and the second end. The closure system may further comprise a closure latch 11175 (FIG. 96), which may include a threaded hole 11176 in threaded engagement with the threaded portion of the closure lead screw 11170. The rotation of the closure lock 11175 can be limited by the closure lead screw 11170 so that rotation of the closing lead screw 11170, the closing lead screw 11170 can displace the closing latch 11175 proximally or distally depending on the direction of rotation of the closing lead screw 11170. Example, when turning the cover the screw shaft 11170 in the first direction closing spindle may bias 11170 11175 distally closing latch, and rotation of the closing screw shaft 11170 in the second, or opposite, direction closing spindle may bias 11170 11175 closing latch proximally. As predominantly shown in FIG. 96, the closure latch 11175 may be mounted on the latch member in the form of a closure channel 11180 extending along the outside of the cassette channel 11170. In various embodiments, the closure channel 11180 may be enclosed within the handle portion 11120, while in some embodiments, the closure channel 11180 may protrude from the handle portion 11120. The closure channel 11180 may comprise an approximately U-shaped channel when viewed from the end, and may include opposing side walls 11182. Each side wall 11182 may include a curved groove 11190 formed therein. As will be further described in detail below, curved grooves 11190 can be configured to interact with the stop 11090 and move the stop 11090 relative to the cassette 11080 with brackets.

In addition to the above, the closure channel 11180 covers the cassette channel 11070 so that the cassette channel 11070 is inserted into the U-shape of the closure channel 11180. As shown primarily in FIG. 96, the cassette channel 11070 may include elongated grooves 11195 formed therein, and the closure channel 11180 may include pins extending inwardly into the elongated grooves 11195. The closure channel pins and elongated grooves 11195 may limit the movement of the closure channel 11180 so that the closing channel 11180 progressively moves relative to the channel 11070 of the cartridge along the longitudinal path. The translational movement of the closing channel 11180 determines the rotation of the stop 11090. The stop 11090 can be connected to the closing channel 11180 by means of a distal closing pin 11210 passing through the curved holes 11211 of the stop formed in the stop 11090 and the curved grooves 11190 formed in the closing channel 11180. Each curved the groove 11190 may include a first or distal end 11191 and a second or proximal end 11192. Each curved groove 11190 may further include a first or proximal end the latching surface 11193 and the second or distal pushing surface 11194. When the closing system is in an open configuration and the stop 11090 is in the open position, the closing channel 11180 may be in the first or non-extended position and the distal closing pin 11210 may be in the first, or distal, ends 11191 of the curved grooves 11190. When the closure channel 11180 extends distally to move the stop 11090 to the cassette 11080 with brackets, the first ejection surface 11193 may interact point with the distal locking pin 11210 and push the distal closing pin 11210 down to the cassette 11080 with brackets. When the closing surface is in a closed configuration and the abutment 11090 is in the closed position opposite the cassette 11080 with the brackets, the closing channel 11180 can be in the second, or fully extended position, and the distal closing pin 11210 can be in the second, proximal ends 11192 of the curved grooves 11190 .

Each curved groove 11190 may have a curved, or arcuate, trajectory. The first ejection surface 11193 may comprise a first arcuate surface, and the second ejection surface 11194 may comprise a second arcuate surface. In various embodiments, each curved groove 11190 may include at least one curved portion and at least a straight portion. In at least one case, each first ejection surface 11193 may comprise a flat surface at the distal end 11191 of the curved groove 11190. The flat surface may comprise a vertical surface perpendicular to, or at least substantially perpendicular to, the longitudinal axis 11030 of tool 11010. Such a flat surface may act as a stopper, while the initial value may be required to displace the closing pin 11210 in the arcuate portion of the curved groove 11190. In some versions Each first ejection surface 11193 may comprise a flat surface 11196 at the proximal end 11192 of the curved groove 11190. Each flat surface 11196 may comprise a horizontal surface parallel to, or at least substantially parallel to, the longitudinal axis 11030. Flat surfaces 11196 may provide a large gear ratio between the closing channel 11180 and the stop 11090. In various examples, the first ejector surfaces 11193 may apply a slight gear ratio to the closing the first pin 11210, when the closing pin 11210 is in the distal ends 11191 of the grooves 11190; however, as the cover pin 11210 slides along the curved grooves 11190 to the proximal ends 11192, the gear ratio applied to the cover pin 11210 by the first mating surfaces 11193 may increase. When the cover pin 11210 enters the proximal ends 11192, the gear ratio applied by the first ejector surfaces 11193 can be maximized and definitely greater than the gear ratio applied by the first ejector surfaces 11193 when the cover pin 11210 is located at the distal ends 11191 of the curved grooves 11191. However, when the distal ends 11191 can apply a lower gear ratio to the closure pin 11210, the distal ends 11191 can quickly displace the closure piece 11210 ft relative to the cassette 11080. When making the cover channel 11180 and distally increasing the transmission ratio applied to the closing pin 11210, as described above, the first pusher surface moves abutment 11193 11090 slower closing speed at a given channel 11180.

As shown in FIG. 96, cassette channel 11070 may further include distal closure grooves 11215 formed therein, which may be configured to receive a distal closure pin 11210 as the stop 11010 approaches the closed position. The distal closing grooves 11215 are substantially vertical and may include open ends at the top of the cassette channel 11070, and their opposite ends may be closed. The open ends of the grooves 11215 may be wider than their closed ends. In various embodiments, the closing pin 11210 may come into contact with the closed ends of the closing grooves 11215 when the stop 11090 reaches the closed position. In such embodiments, the closed ends of the closing grooves 11215 may stop the stop 11090 from moving. In some embodiments, the stop 11090 may come into contact with the cassette 11080 with brackets when the stop 11090 is in its closed position. In at least one case, the abutment 11090 is rotatable around the pivot pin 11200 until the distal end 11091 of the abutment 11090 comes into contact with the distal end 11081 of the cassette 11080 with brackets. As shown in FIG. 98, the distal closing pin 11210 moving the stop 11090 is distally relative to the hinge pin 11220. Thus, the closing force applied to the stop 11090 by the closing actuator acts distally relative to the hinge connecting the stop 11090 to the cassette channel 11070 with rotation. Thus, the opening force applied to the stop 11090 by the closing drive is applied distally relative to the hinge connecting the stop 11090 to the cassette channel 11070 with the possibility of rotation.

As mentioned above, the handle 11015 may include a closing button 11065 configured to actuate the closing system of the surgical instrument 11010. The movement of the closing button 11065 can be detected, for example, by a sensor or a switch. By pressing the closing button 11065, the closing switch 11285 can be activated or closed, with the power being supplied to the closing motor 11110. In such embodiments, the switch 11285 can close the circuit supplying power to the closing motor 11110. In various embodiments, the surgical instrument 11010 may include , for example, a microprocessor. In such embodiments, the closing switch 11285 may be in communication for transmitting a signal to the microprocessor, and, after closing the closing switch 11285, the microprocessor may functionally couple the power supply to the closing motor 11110. In any case, a first voltage polarity may be applied to the closing motor 11110 for rotation closing the outlet barrel 11130 in the first direction and closing the stop 11090, and, in addition, a second, or opposite, voltage polarity can be applied to the 11110 yvayuschemu motor to turn the output of the closure stem 11130 in the second, or opposite, direction, and the opening abutment 11090.

In various embodiments, the surgical instrument 11010 may be configured such that the user of the surgical instrument 11010 must hold the closure button 11065 in a depressed state until the closure actuator reaches a fully closed configuration. If the closing button 11065 is released, the microprocessor can stop the closing motor 11110. Alternatively, the microprocessor can change the direction of the closing motor 11110 if the closing button 11065 is released before the closing actuator switches to a fully closed configuration. After the closing drive has transitioned to a fully closed configuration, the microprocessor may stop the closing motor 11110. In various embodiments, as described in detail below, surgical instrument 11010 may include a closing sensor 11300 (FIGS. 96 and 98) configured to detect that the closing system has reached a fully closed configuration . The closing sensor 11300 may be in communication for transmitting a signal to the microprocessor, which can disconnect the power supply to the closing motor 11110 if the microprocessor receives from the closing sensor 11300 a signal to close the stop 11090. In various embodiments, pressing the closing button 11065 again after switching the closing system to a closed configuration, but before actuating the starting system, it can act on the microprocessor by changing the direction of the closing motor 11110 and re-opening iem stop 11090. In some embodiments, the microprocessor may re-dig abutment 11090, placing it in the fully open position, in other embodiments, the microprocessor may re-open the fence 11090, placing it in a partially open position.

Essentially, after closing the stop 11090, the trigger system of the surgical instrument 11010 can be activated. As predominantly shown in FIG. 95 and 97, the starting system may include a starting motor 11120. The starting motor 11120 may be adjacent to the closing motor 11110. The closing motor 11110 may extend along a first longitudinal axis of the engine, and the starting motor 11120 may extend along a second longitudinal axis of the engine parallel to , or essentially parallel, the first axis of the engine. The first longitudinal axis of the engine and the second longitudinal axis of the engine may be parallel to the longitudinal axis 11030 of the surgical instrument 11010. The closing motor 11110 may be located on the first side of the longitudinal axis 11030, and the starting motor 11120 may be located on the second side of the longitudinal axis 11030. In such embodiments, the first the longitudinal axis of the engine may extend along the first side of the longitudinal axis 11030 and the second longitudinal axis of the engine may extend along the second side of the longitudinal axis 11030. In various embodiments, the first longitudinal Naya motor axis can pass through the center of the closure stem 11130. As above, the starter motor 11120 may include extending away rotatable launcher barrel 11230. Also similar to the above, the second longitudinal axis of the motor may pass through the center of the trigger stem 11230.

In addition to the above, the first starting gear 11240 can be mounted on the starting barrel 11230. The first starting gear 11240 is in gear communication with the starting lead screw 11250 mounted on the starting screw 11260. When the starting barrel 11230 is rotated by the starting motor 11120 the barrel 11230 can rotate the first starting gear 11240, the first starting gear 11240 can rotate the starting pinion drive gear 11250, and the starting pinion drive gear 11250 ozhet rotate trigger spindle 11260. As mainly shown in FIG. 97, a start barrel 11230, a first start gear 11240, a drive screw 11250 of a start screw and / or a start screw 11260 can be rotatably held on the engine lock 11125. The first starting gear 11240 and the driving gear 11250 of the starting lead screw may be located between the engine latch 11125 and the first latch plate 11126. The first retainer plate 11126 may be mounted on the engine retainer 11125 and may also rotatably hold the trigger barrel 11230, the first trigger gear 11240, the trigger pinion drive gear 11250 and / or trigger pin 11260. In various embodiments, surgical instrument 11010 may further comprise a second retainer plate 11127 that can be mounted on the first retainer plate 11126. Similar to the above, the first closing gear 11140, the intermediate gear 11150, and the driving pinion gear 11160 of the closing screw can be located between the first retainer plate 11126 and the second retainer plate 11127. In various embodiments, the first retainer plate 11126 and / or the second retainer plate 11127 may rotatably hold a closure barrel 11130, a first closure gear 11140, an intermediate gear 11150, a drive gear 11160 of a closing lead screw and / or a closing lead screw 11170.

The configuration of the engine and gear described above allows you to save space inside the handle 11015 of the surgical instrument 11010. As described above and as mainly shown in FIG. 97, a closing motor 11110 and a starting motor 11120 are located on the engine lock 11125. The closing motor 11110 is located on one side with the starting motor 11120, somewhat proximal to it. The location of one engine proximally relative to the other provides space for two gear units, with one gear unit located behind another gear unit. For example, a block of closing gears comprising a first closing gear 11140, covering an intermediate gear 11150 and a driving gear 11160 of the closing lead screw, is located proximal to the block of starting gears containing the first starting gear 11240 and the driving gear 11250 of the starting screw. Due to the fact that the engine trunks extend proximally from the jaws, and the main engine body extends distally to the jaws, space is formed in the handle 11015 and allows the handle 11015 to be shortened by parallel alignment of the main engine body 11110 and 11120 along other parts inside the handle 11015.

In addition to the above, the design of the blocks of the closing and starting gears also saves space. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 97, a closing motor 11110 drives three gears, while a starting motor 11120 drives two gears; however, the closing gear unit and the starting gear unit may include any suitable number of gears. Adding a third gear, i.e., a closing intermediate gear 11150 to the block of closing gears, moves the closing spindle 11170 downward relative to the starting spindle 11260 so that the individual spindles can rotate about different axes. In addition, the third gear eliminates the need for gears with a large diameter to offset the axes of the lead screws, thus, the outer diameter of the space required for the gear units and the volume of the handle 11015 can be reduced.

As predominantly shown in FIG. 98, the closing lead screw 11170 may extend along the first longitudinal axis of the barrel, and the starting lead screw 11260 may extend along the second longitudinal axis of the barrel. The first longitudinal axis of the barrel and the second longitudinal axis of the barrel may be parallel to the longitudinal axis 11030 of the surgical instrument 11010. The first longitudinal axis of the barrel or second longitudinal axis of the barrel may be located on a straight line with the longitudinal axis 11030. In various embodiments, the starting spindle 11260 may extend along the longitudinal axis 11030, and the second longitudinal axis of the barrel may be located on a straight line with the longitudinal axis 11030. In such embodiments, the closing spindle 11170 and the first longitudinal axis of the barrel may be offset relative to longitudinal axis 11030.

In addition to the above, the starting screw 11260 may include, for example, a first end rotatably held on an engine lock 11125, a second end rotatably held on a handle 11015, and a threaded portion extending between a first end and a second end . The starter screw 11260 may be arranged in a U-shape of the cassette channel 11070 above the closing lead screw 11170. As shown primarily in FIG. 95, the trigger actuator may further comprise a trigger lock 11265, which may include a threaded hole 11266 in threaded engagement with the threaded portion of the trigger screw 11260. The rotation of the latch lock 11265 may be limited by the trigger screw 11260 so that when the trigger is rotated the closing lead screw 11260 can translationally move the trigger lock 11265 proximally or distally depending on the direction of rotation of the trigger screw 11260 by starting motor 11120. For example, when turning the starting screw 11260 in the first direction, the starting screw 11260 can move the trigger lock 11265 distally, and when turning the starting screw 11260 in the second direction, the screw 11260 can move the trigger 11265 proximally. As described in detail below, the release latch 11265 can be extended distally to eject the staples stored in the drawer 11080 with staples and / or cut through the tissue sandwiched between the drawer cassette 11080 and the stop 11090.

In addition to the above, the trigger lock 11265 may be secured to the pusher lock 11270 so that the pusher lock 11270 progressively moves along with the trigger lock 11265. The trigger system may further include trigger wedges 11280 attached to and extending distally from the pusher lock 11270. Each of the starting wedges 11280 may include at least one curved surface at its distal end, which may be configured to eject staples from the cassette 11080 with staples. The trigger system may further include a scalpel retainer 11281 that slides along trigger wedges 11280. In various embodiments, the initial distal movement of the trigger retainer 11265 may not be transmitted to the scalpel retainer 11281; however, when the trigger lock 11265 is further extended distally, the pusher lock 11270 can engage, for example, with the scalpel lock 11281, and push the scalpel lock 11281 and the scalpel 11282 mounted thereon distally. In other embodiments, the scalpel retainer 11281 can be mounted on the trigger wedges 11280 so that the scalpel retainer 11281 and the scalpel 11282 move together with the trigger wedges 11280 throughout the entire movement of the trigger wedges 11280. The trigger lock 11265, the pusher lock 11270, the trigger wedges 11280, the lock 11281 scalpels and scalpels 11282 can form a pusher and scalpel retainer assembly. In any case, the trigger wedges 11280 and the scalpel 11282 can move distally to simultaneously eject the staples stored inside the cassette 11080 with the staples, and to dissect the tissue sandwiched between the cassette 11080 with the brackets and the stop 11090. The curved surfaces of the start wedges 11280 can be located distally relative to the cutting surface of the scalpel 11282 so that the stitching of the tissue sandwiched between the cassette 11080 with staples and the stop 11090, staples can occur before its dissection.

As indicated above, the closing button 11065, when pressed, interacts with the closing switch 11285 to supply power to the closing motor 11110. Similarly, the starting button 11055, when pressed, interacts with the starting switch 11290 to supply power to the starting motor 11120. In various embodiments, the starting switch 11290 may short circuit the power circuit supplying power to the starting engine 11120. In some embodiments, the starting switch 11290 may be in communication to transmit a signal to the micropro with a surgical instrument 11010, and after closing the start switch 11290, the microprocessor can functionally connect the power supply to the start engine 11120. In any case, the first voltage polarity can be applied to the start engine 11120 to rotate the start output barrel 11230 in the first direction and extend the launch site distally, and a second or opposite voltage polarity may be applied to the starting engine 11120 to rotate the starting output barrel 11230 in the second, or and the opposite direction and retraction of the launch site. In various embodiments, the start button 11055 may include a bi-directional switch configured to actuate the start engine 11120 in the first direction when the start button 11055 is pressed in the first direction, and in the second direction when the start button 11055 is pressed in the second direction.

As indicated above, the trigger system can be activated after the stop 11010 has been sufficiently closed by the closing system. In various embodiments, the emphasis 11090 may be sufficiently closed when it reaches a fully closed position. Surgical instrument 11010 may be configured to detect the abutment 11090 reaching a fully closed position. As predominantly shown in FIG. 98, the surgical instrument 11010 may include a closure sensor 11300 configured to detect that the closure channel 11180 has reached the end of the closure measure, and thereby detect that the stop 11090 is in the closed position. The closing sensor 11300 may be located at or adjacent to the distal end of the closing lead screw 11170. In at least one embodiment, the closure sensor 11300 may include a proximity sensor configured to sense the proximity and / or contact of the closure channel 11180 with the closure sensor 11300. Similar to the above, the closure sensor 11300 may be in communication with a microprocessor of a surgical instrument 11010 . After the microprocessor receives a signal from the closing sensor 11300 that the closing channel 11180 has reached the fully extended position, and the stop 11090 is in the closed position, the microprocessor The processor can enable activation of the launch system. In addition, the microprocessor may prevent the activation of the starting system until the microprocessor receives such a signal from the sensor 11300 close. In such embodiments, the microprocessor may selectively supply power from the power source to the starting motor 11120, or selectively control the power supplied to the starting motor 11120 based on an input from the closure sensor 11300. Finally, in all embodiments, the start switch 11290 cannot initiate a start cycle until the tool closes.

Some embodiments are provided in which the trigger system of the surgical instrument 11010 can be actuated even if the closure system is in a partially closed configuration and the stop 11090 is in a partially closed position. In at least one embodiment, the trigger assembly of the surgical instrument 11010 may be configured to interact with the abutment 11090 and move the abutment 11090 to a fully closed position when the trigger assembly is extended distally to eject the staples stored in the cassette 11080 with staples. For example, the scalpel 11282 may include a cam element configured to interact with the abutment 11090 when the scalpel 11282 extends distally, as a result of which the abutment 11090 moves to a fully closed position. The scalpel 11282 may also include a second cam element configured to interact with the cassette channel 11070. The cam elements may be configured to set a stop 11090 relative to the cassette 11080 with staples and to set the size of the gap for the fabric between them. In at least one case, the scalpel 11282 may comprise an I-beam that is distally offset to define a clearance for the tissue, eject the brackets from the brace cassette 11080, and dissect the tissue.

Surgical instrument 11010 may include a sensor configured to detect completion of the trigger cycle by the trigger system. In at least one case, the surgical instrument 11010 may include a sensor, such as, for example, an encoder, which may be configured to record and count the number of rotations of the starting screw 11260. Such a sensor may be in communication with the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 11010 for transmission signal. The microprocessor can be configured to count the number of rotations of the starting lead screw 11260, and after the starting lead screw 11260 has the number of revolutions sufficient to eject all the brackets from the cassette 11080 with brackets, the microprocessor can suspend the power supply to the starting motor 11120 to install the starting screw 11260. In some embodiments, the microprocessor can reverse the polarity of the voltage applied to the 11120 trigger motor to automatically retract the trigger assembly after all staples starting node.

As indicated above, the surgical instrument 11010 may include a power source. The power source may include a power source located outside the handle 11015, and a cable that may, for example, extend into the handle 11015. The power source may include at least one battery contained in the handle 11015. The battery may be located in the first a handle portion 11020 and / or in a handle grip 11040. It is contemplated that batteries, gears, engines, and rotating shafts may be combined into a single unit configured to separate from the rest of the handle 11015. Such a unit may be configured to be cleaned and sterilized.

In various embodiments, the surgical instrument 11010 may include one or more indicators configured to indicate the status of the surgical instrument 11010. In at least one such embodiment, the surgical instrument 11010 may include, for example, an LED 11100. To transmit a status signal the surgical instrument to the user, the LED 11100 may glow in various colors during various operating states of the surgical instrument 11010. For example, the LED 11100 may glow ervym color when power is applied to the surgical instrument 11010, and there is no unused cartridge 11080 staples in channel 11070 cassette. Surgical instrument 11010 may include one or more sensors configured to detect the presence of a cassette 11080 with staples in the channel 11070 of the cassette and ejecting the staples from the cassette 11080 with staples. The LED 11100 may glow in a second color when power is applied to the surgical instrument 11010 and the unused cassette 11080 is positioned with brackets in the cassette channel 11070. The LED 11010 can glow in a third color when power is applied to the tool 11010, loading an unspent cartridge 11080 with brackets into the channel 11070 of the cartridge and locating the stop 11090 in the closed position. Such a third color may indicate that the surgical instrument 11010 is ready to activate the staples from the cassette 11080 with staples. The 11100 LED may glow in a fourth color after the start of the start-up process. The LED may glow in fifth color after the start-up process. This is just one example of implementation. Any suitable number of colors can be used to indicate any suitable number of states of the surgical instrument 11010. In addition to using one or more LEDs to transmit a signal about the state of the surgical instrument, other indicators are allowed.

In use, the user of the surgical instrument 11010 may first load the cassette 11080 with brackets into the surgical instrument 11010 by placing the cassette 11080 with brackets in the channel 11070 of the cassette. Loading the cassette 11080 into the cassette channel 11070 may cause the color of the LED 11100 to change from a first color to a second color. The user can grab hold of the handle grip 11040 and use the thumb to activate the closing switch 11065 to open the stop 11090 of the surgical instrument 11010 to place the cassette 11080 with brackets inside the cassette channel 11070. The user can then install a cassette 11080 with staples on one side of the fabric requiring stapling and dissection, and a stop 11090 on the opposite side of the fabric. By holding the closing button 11065 with the thumb, the user can close the surgical tool 11010. Release of the closing button 11065 before the closing cycle has ended may re-open the stop 11090 and allow the user. if necessary, move the surgical tool 11010. The user has the advantage of using an open linear cutting tool with jaws rotatable without having to assemble parts of the linear cutting tool. The user can further take advantage of the pistol grip.

When the stop 11090 is moved to the fully closed position, the closing channel 11080 can come into contact with the closing sensor 11300, and the closing sensor 11300 can send a signal to the microprocessor to activate the start switch 11290. At this moment, the LED 11100 can glow in the third color, indicating that the surgical instrument 11010 is charged, closed and ready to start. Then, the user can press the start button 11055, which interacts with the start switch 11290 and actuates the start switch 11290 to supply power to the start engine 11120. When power is applied, the start engine 11120 rotates the start barrel 11230, which, in turn, rotates the first start gear 11240 and a drive gear 11250 of the starting lead screw. The drive gear of the trigger screw 11250 rotates the trigger screw 11260. The thread of the trigger screw 11260 interacts and applies force to the internal thread formed in the trigger lock 11265 to move the trigger lock 11265 distally. The trigger lock 11265 moves the pusher lock 11270 distally, releasing the trigger wedges 11280 distally. Curved surfaces 11305 at the distal end of the starting wedges 11280 raise the staples stored in the cassette with brackets 11080 to the abutment 11090, and the abutment 11090 can form the staples, securing the fabric. The pusher latch 11270 interacts with the scalpel block 11281 to push the scalpel latch 11281 and the scalpel 11282 distally to dissect the stapled tissue. After the start of the clock cycle, the direction of rotation of the starter motor 11120 can be reversed in order to return the pusher latch 11270, the scalpel latch 11281, the starting wedges 11280 and the scalpel 11282 to their original state. Surgical instrument 11010 may include a button and / or a switch that automatically instructs the microprocessor to retract the trigger assembly, even if the trigger cycle is not yet complete. In some embodiments, the launch site can be made without the possibility of retraction. In any case, the user can open the surgical instrument 11010 by pressing the closing button 11065. The closing button 11065 can interact with the closing switch 11285 and supply power to the closing motor 11110. The closing motor 11110 can be operated in the opposite direction to retract the closing channel 11180 proximally to reopen emphasis 11090 of the surgical instrument 11010. The LED 11100 may glow in a fourth color, indicating that the cassette has been used and the procedure is completed.

Surgical stapling instrument 12010 is shown in FIG. 99-106. Tool 12010 may include a handle 12015 that closes the actuator, comprising a closure latch 12050 configured to compress tissue between the cassette 12080 with brackets and stop 12090, and a trigger actuator configured to eject the staples from the cassette 12080 with the brackets and cut through the fabric. In FIG. 99, tool 12010 is displayed in an open, unlocked state. When the tool 12010 is in an open, unlocked state, the stop 12090 rotates from the cassette 12080 with brackets. In various embodiments, the stop 12090 can rotate relative to the cassette 12080 with brackets in the wide angle so that the stop 12090 and the cassette 12080 with brackets can easily be installed on opposite sides of the fabric. In FIG. 100, tool 12010 is displayed in a closed, unlocked state. When the tool 12010 is in a closed, unlocked state, the stop 12090 is rotated to the cassette 12080 with brackets in the closed position opposite the cassette 12080 with brackets. In various embodiments, the closed position of the stop 12090 may depend on the thickness of the fabric located between the stop 12090 and the cassette 12080 with brackets. For example, the stop 12090 can reach a closed position further from the cassette 12080 with brackets, in the case where the fabric located between the stop 12090 and the cassette 12080 with brackets is thicker than when the fabric is thinner. In FIG. 101, tool 12010 is displayed in a closed, locked state. When the tool 12010 is in the closed, locked state, the closure latch 12050 interacts with the stop 12090, and fixes the position of the stop 12090 relative to the cassette 12080 with brackets. At this point, as described in detail below, the trigger actuator of the surgical instrument 12010 can be activated to eject the staples from the staple cassette 12080 and cut the tissue.

As shown primarily in FIG. 106, the surgical instrument 12010 may include a frame 12020 directed from the handle 12015. The frame 12020 may include a frame channel 12022 formed therein and configured to receive and / or hold the cassette channel 12070. Cassette channel 12070 may include a proximal end and a distal end. The proximal end of the cassette channel 12070 may be connected to the frame 12020. The distal end of the cassette channel 12070 may be removably received to receive the cassette 12080. The frame channel 12022 may include hinge holes 12207 formed on its opposite sides. The hinge pin 12205 may be held in the hinge holes 12207 and may extend between the sides of the channel 12022. The closure latch 12050 may include a latch frame 12051 comprising latch bars 12052. The latch strips 12052 can be rotatably mounted on the frame 12020 using a hinge pin 12205 that can pass through the hinge holes 12206 formed in the latch strips 12052. In various embodiments, the hinge holes 12206, 12207 and the hinge pin 12205 may form a fixed axis 12208, around which the closure latch 12050 can rotate. The closure latch 12050 may further include a latch housing 12057 mounted to the latch bars 12052. When moving the retainer body 12057 by the user of the surgical instrument 12010, the retainer body 12057 can move the retainer bars 12052. The operation of the locking tab 12050 is described in detail below.

In addition to the foregoing, the abutment 12090 may include a proximal end and a distal end. The distal end of the stop 12090 may include a plurality of recesses for forming the brackets, configured to align or align with the cavity for the brackets formed in the cassette 12080 for brackets when the stop 12090 is in the closed position. The proximal end of the stop 12090 can be rotatably connected to the frame 12020. The stop 12090 may include a hinge hole 12201, which can be aligned with the hinge holes 12202 formed in the cassette channel 12207, and the hinge hole 12203 formed in the frame 12020. The hinge pin 12200 can pass through the hinge holes 12201, 12202 and 12203 and can rotatably connect the stop 12090 with the channel 12207 of the cartridge. In various embodiments, the hinge holes 12201, 12202 and 12203 and the hinge pin 12200 can form a fixed axis, around which the stop 12090 can rotate. In some embodiments, the hinge holes 12201, 12202 and / or 12203 can be elongated longitudinally, for example, so that the hinge pin 12200 can slide in the hinge holes 12201, 12202 and / or 12203. In such embodiments, the stop 12090 can rotate around an axis relative to the channel 12070 of the cartridge, and, in addition, translationally move relative to the channel 12070 of the cartridge. The stop 12090 may further include a stop housing 12097 mounted thereon. When moving the abutment housing 12097 by the user of the surgical instrument 12010, the abutment housing 12097 can move the abutment 12090 so that the abutment 12090 can rotate between the open position (FIG. 99) and the closed position (FIG. 100).

In addition to the above, the abutment 12090 may further include a latch pin 12210. The abutment 12090 may include a latch pin holes 12211, and the abutment body 12097 may include latch pin holes 12212 configured to receive and hold the latch pin 12210. After moving the stop 12090 to the closed position or the position adjacent to the closed position, the latch 12050 can interact with the latch pin 12210 and pull the stop 12090 to the cassette 12080 with brackets. In various embodiments, each latch bar 12052 of the latch 12050 may include a latch arm 12053 configured to engage with the latch pin 12210. The latch 12050 may rotate between the unlocked position (FIG. 100), in which the latch arms 12053 do not interact with the latch pin 12210, and locked position (FIG. 101). When moving the latch 12050 between the unlocked position and the locked position, the latch levers 12053 can interact with the latch pin 12210 and move the stop 12090 to the cassette 12080 with brackets. Each latch arm 12053 may include a curved surface configured to contact the latch pin 12210. Curved surfaces may be configured to push and guide the latch pin 12210 to the cassette 12080. When the latch 12050 reaches the locked position, the latch pin 12210 is caught in the latch grooves 12054 formed in the latch bars 12052. The latch grooves 12054 may be at least partially defined by the latch shoulders 12053. The opposite sides of the latch grooves 12054 can include bearing surfaces that can be adapted to engage the latch pin 12210 and lift the latch 12090 from the cassette 12080 with brackets when the latch 12050 is rotated between the locked position and the unlocked position to open the tool 12010, as further described in detail below.

As indicated above, the stop 12090 can be moved to the cassette 12080 with brackets. In various embodiments, the movement of the stop 12090 to the cassette 12080 with brackets can be stopped when the distal end of the stop 12090 comes into contact with the distal end of the cassette 12080 with brackets. In some embodiments, the movement of the stop 12090 may be stopped by contacting the latch pin 12210 with the cassette channel 12070. The cassette channel 12070 may include grooves 12215 formed therein, adapted to receive a snap pin 12210. Each groove 12215 may include an upwardly facing open end through which the snap pin 12210 can enter a groove 12215, and furthermore, a closed end. In various embodiments, the latch pin 12210 may come into contact with the closed ends of the slots 12215 when the stop 12090 reaches the closed position. In some embodiments, the latch pin 12210 may not come into contact with the closed ends of the slots 12215 if there is a thick cloth between the stop 12090 and the cassette 12080 with staples. In at least one embodiment, the stop 12090 may further include a stop pin 12095. The stop pin 12095 may be mounted and held onto the stop 12090 via the pin holes 12096 formed therein. The restriction pin 12095 may be configured to come into contact with the cassette channel 12070 and stop the stop 12090 from moving to the cassette 12080 with brackets. Similar to the above, the cassette channel 12070 may further include restrictive holes 12075 formed therein, which may be configured to receive a restrictive pin 12095. Each restrictive groove 12075 may include an upwardly facing open end through which the restrictive pin 12095 may extend in the restrictive groove 12275, and, in addition, the closed end. In various embodiments, the limit pin 12095 may come into contact with the closed ends of the limit grooves 12075 when the stop 12090 reaches the closed position. In some embodiments, the stop pin 12095 may not come into contact with the closed ends of the stop grooves 12075 if there is a thick cloth between the stop 12090 and the cassette 12080 with brackets.

As indicated above, the cassette channel 12070 may be mounted on the frame 12020. In various embodiments, the cassette channel 12070 may be rigidly and stationary mounted on the frame 12020. In such embodiments, the cassette channel 12070 may not be able to be moved relative to the frame 12020 and / or the handle 12015. In some embodiments, the cassette channel 12070 may be pivotally coupled to the frame 12020. In at least one such embodiment, the cassette channel 12070 may include pivot holes 12202 formed therein, which may be configured to receive a pivot pin 12200. In such circumstances, both the stop 12090 and the cassette channel 12070 may be rotatable relative to the frame 12020 around the pivot pin 12200. The latch 12050 can hold the stop 12090 and the cassette channel 12070 in place when the latch 12050 interacts with the latch pin 12210.

In some embodiments, in addition to the above, tool 12010 may include one or more sensors configured to detect that the stop 12090 is in the closed position. In at least one embodiment, tool 12010 may include a pressure sensor located between frame 12020 and cassette channel 12070. The pressure sensor can be installed, for example, on the channel 12022 of the frame or the bottom of the channel 12070 of the cartridge. If a pressure sensor is installed at the bottom of the cassette channel 12070, the pressure sensor may come into contact with the frame channel 12022 when moving the cassette channel 12070 to the frame channel 12022. The cassette channel 12070 can move to the frame channel 12022 if the cassette channel 12070 is rotatable relative to the frame channel 12022, as described above. In addition, or instead of the above, the cassette channel 12070 can move to the frame channel 12022 if the cassette channel 12070 is bent to the frame channel 12022. The cassette channel 12070 may bend to the frame channel 12022 when a compressive load occurs between the stop 12090 and the cassette channel 12070. A compressive load between the stop 12090 and the cassette channel 12070 can occur when the stop 12090 moves to the closed position and / or when the stop 12090 moves to the cassette channel 12070 by means of a latch 12050. When pushing the stop 12090 to the cassette channel 12070 and / or when the latch 12050 is used to pull the stop 12090 to the cassette channel 12070, the cassette channel 12070 can abut against the hinge pin 12205. In various embodiments, the cassette channel 12070 can include a groove or groove 12209 formed therein, which can be adapted to receive the hinge IPT 12205. In either case, the pressure sensor can be configured to detect the pressure or force applied to the cartridge channel 12070. The pressure sensor may be in communication with a microprocessor of a surgical instrument 12010 for transmitting a signal. If the pressure or force detected by the pressure sensor exceeds a threshold value, the microprocessor may enable activation of the trigger system of the tool 12010 for actuation. Before the pressure or force exceeds the threshold value, the microprocessor can warn the user of the surgical instrument 12010 that the stop 12090 cannot be closed, or that it is sufficiently closed, when the user tries to actuate the trigger system. In addition, or instead of warning, the microprocessor may interfere with the actuation of the starting system of the tool 12010 if the pressure or force detected by the pressure sensor does not exceed a threshold value.

In some embodiments, in addition to the above, tool 12010 may include one or more sensors configured to detect whether the latch 12050 is in the locked position. In at least one embodiment, tool 12010 may include a sensor 12025 located between frame 12020 and cassette channel 12070. The sensor 12025 can be mounted, for example, on the channel 12022 of the frame or on the bottom of the channel 12070 cassettes. If a sensor 12025 is installed at the bottom of the cassette channel 12070, the latch 12050 can interact with the sensor 12025 when the latch 12050 moves from the unlocked position to the locked position. The sensor 12025 may be in communication with a microprocessor of a surgical instrument 12010 for transmitting a signal. When the sensor 12025 detects that the latch 12050 is in the locked position, the microprocessor can enable the trigger system of the tool 12010 to be activated. Before the sensor 12025 detects that the latch 12050 is in the locked position, the microprocessor can warn the user of the surgical instrument 12010 that the stop 12090 cannot be closed, or sufficiently closed, when the user attempts to actuate the launch system. In addition, or instead of such a warning, the microprocessor can prevent the trigger system of the tool 12010 from being activated if the latch 12050 is not detected in the locked position. In various embodiments, the sensor 12025 may be, for example, a near-location sensor. In specific embodiments, the sensor 12025 may be, for example, a Hall sensor. In at least one such embodiment, the latch 12050 may include at least one magnetic element, such as, for example, a permanent magnet that can be detected by a Hall sensor. In various embodiments, for fixing the sensor 12025, for example, bracket 12026 can be used.

As shown primarily in FIG. 105, the starting system of the surgical instrument 12010 may include a starting engine 12120 configured to rotate the starting barrel 12230. The starting engine 12120 may be mounted on the engine frame 12125 inside the handle 12015 of the surgical instrument 12010 so that the starting barrel 12230 extends distally. The starter system may further comprise a gear lock, including, firstly, a first starter gear 12240 mounted on the closing barrel 12230, and, secondly, a lead screw gear 12250 mounted on the lead screw 12260. The first starter gear 12240 may be in gear engagement with the lead screw gear 12250 so that when the first starting gear 12240 is rotated by the starting barrel 12230, the first starting gear 12240 can rotate the lead screw gear 12250, and the lead screw gear 12250 can orachivat spindle 12260. As mainly shown in FIG. 104, the lead screw 12260 may comprise a first end 12261 rotatably mounted 12250 in the hole formed in the engine retainer 12125 and a second end 12263 rotatably held in the bearing mounted on the arm bearing portion 12264 12015. The lead screw 12260 may further include a threaded portion 12262 extending between the first end 12261 and the second end 12263. The starter system may further comprise a starting nut 12265 in threaded engagement with the threaded portion 12262 of the travel v 12260. The rotation of the starter nut 12265 can be limited by the lead screw 12260 so that when the lead screw 12260 is rotated in the first direction by the starter motor 12120, the lead screw 12260 can extend the starter nut 12265 distally and, accordingly, when the lead screw 12260 is rotated in the second, or in the opposite direction, by starting engine 12120, the lead screw 12260 can retract the starting nut 12265 proximally.

In addition to the above, the starting nut 12265 can be mounted on the starting lock 12270, which can progressively move with the starting nut 12265. In various embodiments, the starting nut 12265 and the starting lock 12270 can be a single unit. Similarly to the aforementioned, the launch system may further include launching rods 12280 extending therefrom, progressively moving together with the starting nut 12265 and the starting block 12270. In various embodiments, the starting nut 12265, the starting lock 12270 and the starting rods 12280 may form a starting unit, translationally moved proximally and / or distally by means of a lead screw 12160. When extending the trigger assembly distally by means of a lead screw 12260, the trigger rods 12280 can go into the cartridge 12080 with brackets and alkylate staples from it. The trigger system may further comprise a scalpel retainer 12281 and a scalpel holder 12282 mounted thereon extending from the scalpel retainer 12281. When the trigger lock 12270 extends distally, the trigger rods 12280 can interact with the scalpel lock 12281 and extend the scalpel lock 12281 and the scalpel holder 12282 distally. In various embodiments, the trigger retainer 12270 can move relative to the scalpel retainer 12281 at the initial stage of the trigger cycle and then move with it at the final stage of the trigger cycle. In at least one such case, the trigger rods 12280 can slide through the grooves formed in the scalpel retainer 12281 until one or more embossed surfaces extending from the trigger rods 12280 come into contact with the scalpel block 12281 and push the retainer 12281 of the scalpel distally with the trigger rods 12280. In various embodiments, the trigger assembly may further include a scalpel retainer 12281 and a scalpel holder 12282 that can move simultaneously with the trigger lock 12270 and the trigger rods 12280. B in any case, when extending the scalpel holder 12282, the distally cutting edge 12283 of the scalpel holder 12282 can dissect the tissue sandwiched between the abutment 12090 and the cassette 12080 with brackets. The contents of US Patent No. 4,633,874, entitled "SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH BRANCHE LOCKING MECHANISM AND ONE-TIME DISPENSER", issued January 6, 1987, is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

As shown primarily in FIG. 106, the trigger system of the surgical instrument 12010 may include a trigger button 12055 and a trigger switch 12290. When the user of the surgical instrument 12010 presses the trigger button 12055, the trigger button 12055 can come into contact with the trigger switch 12290 and close the trigger circuit, which can actuate starting engine 12120. When the user of the surgical instrument 12010 releases the starting button 12055, the starting circuit may open and the power to the starting engine 12120 may be cut off. The start button 12055 can be pressed again, again actuating the starting engine 12120. In some embodiments, the starting button 12055 can have a two-way switch that, when pressed in the first direction, can trigger the start engine 12120 in the first direction, and when pressed in the second direction, actuate the starting motor 12120 in a second or opposite direction. The start switch 12090 and / or any suitable design of the start switches may be in communication for transmitting a signal to the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 12010, which may be configured to control the power supply to the start motor 12120. In some embodiments, in addition to the above, the microprocessor may ignore signals from start button 12055 until the sensor 12025 detects that the latch 12050 is closed. In any case, the trigger button 12055 can be pressed in the first direction to extend the trigger rods 12280 and the scalpel 12282 distally, and can be pressed in the second direction to retract the trigger rods 12280 and the scalpel 12282 proximally. In some embodiments, the surgical instrument 12010 may include a start button and a switch configured to actuate a start engine 12120 in a first direction, and a retract button and a switch configured to actuate a start engine 12120 in a second direction. After retracting the trigger rods 12280 and the scalpel 12282, the latch 12050 can be moved from the locked position to the unlocked position, releasing the latch arms 12053 from the latch pin 12210. Further, the emphasis 12090 can rotate from the cassette 12080 with brackets and return the surgical instrument 12010 to an open, unfixed state. Similar to the above, the surgical instrument 12010 may include one or more indicators, such as, for example, an LED 12100 configured to indicate the status of the surgical instrument 12010. The LED 12100 may be in communication with a microprocessor of the surgical instrument 12010, and may operate similarly as described, for example, with respect to the LED 11100. The LED 12100 can be held in place, for example, by means of the bracket 12101.

In various embodiments, tool 12010 may include a trigger lock system that can block the extension of the scalpel 12282 and / or trigger rods 12280 if the stop 12090 is not in a closed or sufficiently closed position. As shown in FIG. 104 and 106, the tool 12010 may include a biasing element 12400 mounted, for example, on the cassette channel 12070 and capable of shifting the scalpel 12282 in cooperation with the locking portion of the handle 12015. When the stop 12090 is rotated to the closed position, the stop 12090 may push the scalpel 12282 down from the fixing portion , against the action of the biasing force of the biasing element 12400. At this point, the scalpel 12282 can be extended distally. Similarly, tool 12010 may include a biasing member capable of biasing the trigger rods 12280 into engagement with the locking portion of the handle 12015, with the stop 12090 releasing the trigger rods 12280 from the locking portion by moving the stop 12090 to the closed position.

Surgical instrument 12010 may include a manually-operated closure system and a trigger-assisted stapling system. Section 12040 of the handle 12015 can be gripped with one hand by the user of the surgical instrument 12010, and the focus stop 12090 and the latch 12050 can be manipulated with the other hand. In the process of closing the latch 12050, in at least one embodiment, the user can move one of his hands in the general direction of his other hand, which can reduce the unexpected or accidental movement of the surgical instrument 12010. The surgical instrument 12010 receive power from any suitable power source. For example, an electric cable may extend from an external power source into the handle 12015. In some embodiments, the battery may be stored, for example, in the handle 12015.

A surgical stapling instrument 13010 is shown in FIG. 107-110. In FIG. 107 is a side view of a surgical instrument 13010, some components removed and others shown in cross section. Tool 13010 may include a handle 13015, a first actuator 13020, a second actuator 13030, a barrel assembly 13040, and an end effector 13012 including a stop 13050 and a cassette 13055 with brackets. The stem portion 13040 and the stop 13050 may operate as shown and described in US Pat. No. 5,704,534, entitled “HINGE ASSEMBLY FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, issued January 6, 1998. Description of US Patent No. 5,704,534, entitled “HINGE ASSEMBLY FOR SURGERY January 6, 1998, is fully incorporated herein by reference. An electrical input cable 13018 may connect the instrument 13010 to an external power source. In at least one embodiment, the external power source may be a generator, for example, a GEN11 generator manufactured by Ethicon Energy, Cincinnati, Ohio, USA. In various embodiments, the external power source may comprise an AC to DC converter. In some embodiments, instrument 13010 can be powered by an internal battery, such as the batteries shown and described in US Pat. No. 8,210,411, entitled “SURGICAL CUTTING TOOL WITH A DRIVE”, issued July 3, 2012. Description of US Patent 8,210,411, entitled “SURGERY OF THE SURGERY WITH DRIVE ”, issued July 3, 2012, is fully incorporated herein by reference.

In various embodiments, implementation, as shown mainly in FIG. 107, the stop 13050 of the end effector 13012 may be movable between an open position, as shown in FIG. 107, and a closed position in which the stop 13050 is adjacent or in contact with the cassette 13055 with brackets, as further described below in more detail. In at least one such embodiment, the cassette 13055 with brackets may be rotatable relative to the stop 13050. In some not shown embodiments, the cassette 13055 with brackets may be rotatable relative to the stop 13050. In at least one such embodiment, the stop 13050 may to be made without the possibility of rotation relative to the cartridge 13055 with brackets. In any case, the user of the tool 13010 can manipulate the end effector 13012 to place the fabric T between the stop 13050 and the cassette 13055. After the tissue T is placed between the stop 13050 and the cassette 13055 with brackets, the user can pull the first actuator 13020 and activate the tool closing system 13010. The closing system can move the stop 13050 relative to the cassette 13055 with brackets. For example, the first actuator 13020 can be pulled to a portion of the pistol grip 13016 of the grip 13015 to close the stop 13050, as further described in more detail below.

The closing actuator may include a closing motor 13105 (FIG. 110) configured to move the stop 13050. The closing motor 13105 can be attached to the handle 13015, for example, by an engine bracket 13101. Compressing the first actuator 13020 from the open position (FIG. 108) to the closed position (FIG. 109) may supply power to the closing motor 13105. As shown mainly in FIG. 110, the closing motor 13105 may include a rotatable output shaft operatively cooperating with the closing spindle 13110. When the closing motor 13105 rotates the output shaft in a first direction, the output shaft may rotate the closing spindle 13110 in a first direction. The closing lead screw 13110 may be functionally held within the handle 13015 rotatably and may include a threaded portion. The closing drive may also further comprise a closing nut threadedly engaging with the threaded portion of the closing lead screw 13110. The closing nut may not be able to rotate together with the closing lead screw 13110 so that the rotational movement of the closing lead screw 13110 can translationally move the closing nut. The closure nut may come into contact or may be integral with the closure plug 13120. When the closure motor 13015 is rotated in the first direction, the closure spindle 13110 can extend the closure fork 13120 distally. In various embodiments, the closing fork 13120 may be slidably held within the handle 13015 by means of guides 13122 extending from the handle 13015 that limit the movement of the closing fork 13120 along a path along the longitudinal axis. Such an axis may be parallel, substantially parallel, collinear, or substantially collinear to the longitudinal axis formed by the stem assembly 13040. The closing actuator may further comprise a closing tube 13125 extending distally from the closing fork 13120. The closing tube 13125 may also be part of the barrel assembly 13040 and may progressively move relative to the frame of the barrel assembly 13040. By distally extending the closing fork 13120 by means of the closing lead screw 13110, the closing fork 13120 can extend the distal closing tube 13125. The distal end of the closing tube 13125 can interoperate with the stop 13050 so that when the closing tube 13125 extends distally, this closing tube 13125 can push the stop 13050 from the open position to the closed position. US Pat. No. 5,704,534, entitled “HINGE ASSEMBLY FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, issued January 6, 1998, describes a manual closing system.

In at least one form, tool 13010 may include a closure system switch located in handle 13015 that can close when the first actuator 13020 moves from the open position (FIG. 108) to the closed position (FIG. 109). In some embodiments, the closing system switch may close when the first actuator 13020 is in the closed position (FIG. 109). In any case, when the closing system switch is closed, the closing system power circuit may be closed and supplying electric power to the closing motor 13105 to rotate the closing motor 13105 in a first direction, as described above. In some embodiments, the surgical instrument 13010 may include a microprocessor and, similar to the above, the closure system switch may be in communication to transmit a signal to the microprocessor. When the closing system switch sends a signal to the microprocessor indicating that the first actuator 13020 is closed, the microprocessor can supply power to the closing motor 13105 to actuate the closing motor 13105 in the first direction and move the stop 13050 to the closed position. In various embodiments, the closing motor 13105 can move the stop 13050 to the closed position as long as the first actuator 13020 is at least partially activated and while the switch of the closing system is in the closed state. When the user releases the first actuator 13020, and the first actuator 13020 returns to the inactive position, the closing system switch may open, and the power to the closing motor 13105 may be interrupted. Such options may leave the stop 13050 in a partially closed position. By reactivating the first actuator 13020 and closing the switch of the closing system, power can again be supplied to the closing motor 13105 to move the stop 13050 to the closed position. In light of the foregoing, the user of the surgical instrument 13010 can activate the first actuator 13020 and wait until the closing motor 13105 moves the stop 13050 to the fully closed position.

In at least one form, the movement of the first actuator 13020 can be proportional to the movement of the stop 13050. The first actuator 13020 can move through the first, or related to the activator, range of movement when moving between the open position (FIG. 108) and the closed position (FIG. 109). Similarly, the stop 13050 can move through the second or relative to the stop range of movement when moving between the open position (FIG. 107) and the closed position. The range of movement of the actuator may correspond to the range of movement of the stop. As an example, the range of movement of the actuator may be equal to the range of movement of the stop. For example, the range of movement of the actuator may be approximately 30 degrees, and the range of movement of the stop may be approximately 30 degrees. In such embodiments, the stop 13050 can be in its fully open position when the first actuator 13020 is in its fully open position, the stop 13050 can be rotated 10 degrees to its closed position, when the first actuator 13020 is rotated 10 degrees to its closed position, the stop 13050 can be rotated 20 degrees to its closed position when the first actuator 13020 is rotated 20 degrees to its closed position, etc. This is directly proportional to The closure of the first actuator 13020 and the stop 13050 can give the user 13010 a sense of the position of the stop 13050 relative to the cassette 13055 with brackets when the stop 13050 is hidden from view in the surgical field.

In addition to the above, the stop 13050 can respond to both the closing and opening movements of the first actuator 13020. For example, when the first actuator 13020 is moved 10 degrees to the pistol grip 13016, the stop 13050 can move 10 degrees to the cassette 13055 with brackets and when moving the first actuator 13020 10 degrees from the pistol grip 13016, the emphasis 13050 can move 10 degrees from the cartridge 13055 with brackets. Although the movement of the first actuator 13020 and the movement of the stop 13050 can be directly proportional in a 1: 1 ratio, other ratios are also possible. For example, moving the first actuator 13020 and moving the stop 13050 can be directly proportional, for example, in a 2: 1 ratio. In such embodiments, the stop 13050 will move 1 degree relative to the cassette 13055 with brackets while moving the first actuator 13020 2 degrees relative to the pistol grip 13016. In addition, in such cases, the range of movement of the first actuator 13020 may be twice as large as the range of movement of the stop 13050. In another embodiment, the movement of the first actuator 13020 and the movement of the stop 13050 can be directly proportional, for example, in a ratio of 1: 2. In such embodiments, the stop 13050 will move 2 degrees relative to the cassette 13055 with brackets while moving the first actuator 13020 by 1 degree relative to the pistol grip 13016. In addition, in such cases, the range of movement of the first actuator 13020 may be half that of the range of movement of the stop 13050. In various embodiments, the movement of the first actuator 13020 may be linearly proportional to the movement of the stop 13050. In other embodiments, schenie first actuator 13020 can be linearly proportional to the displacement of the stop 13050. Regardless of the ratio of such embodiments may be possible by, for example, the use of potentiometers which may estimate the rotation of the first actuator 13020, which will be further described in more detail below.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 108-110, the tool closing system 13010 may include a slider potentiometer 13090 that can detect movement of the first actuator 13020. The first actuator 13020 can be rotatably mounted on the handle 13015, for example, by a hinge 13021. The first actuator 13020 may include a gear section 13070, which contains several gear teeth extending around the circumference around the hinge 13021. In addition to the above, when the first actuator is rotated mechanism 13020 proximal to the pistol grip 13016 gear section 13070 can be rotated distally. Accordingly, when the first actuator 13020 is rotated distally from the pistol grip 13016, the gear portion 13070 can rotate proximally. The closing system may further comprise a closing fork rail 13080 that is held slidingly within the handle 13015. The closing fork rail 13080 may comprise a longitudinal set of teeth extending along its lower surface that face gear portion 13070 of the first actuator 13020. Gear section 13070 of the first actuator mechanism 13020 can be in engaging interaction with a set of teeth made in the rail 13080 of the closing fork so that when turning the first of the actuator 13020 around the hinge 13021, the first actuator 13020 can bias the rail 13080 of the closing fork proximally or distally, depending on the direction of rotation of the first actuator 13020. For example, when the first actuator 13020 is rotated toward the pistol grip 13016, the first actuator 13020 can bias the rail 13080 closing plug distally. Accordingly, when the first actuator 13020 is rotated away from the pistol grip 13016, the first actuator 13020 can offset the closure fork rail 13080 proximally. The handle 13015 may include a guide groove formed therein, which may be arranged to slidely hold the cover fork rail 13080 and limit the movement of the cover fork rail 13080 to a path defined along the longitudinal axis. Such a longitudinal axis may be parallel, substantially parallel, collinear, or substantially collinear, of the longitudinal axis of the barrel assembly 13040.

The closing fork rail 13080 may include a detectable member 13081 mounted thereon. The detected element 13081 may contain a magnetic element, for example, a permanent magnet. The detected element 13081 can be made to translate within the longitudinal groove 13091 formed in the slider potentiometer 13090, when the rail 13080 of the closing fork inside the handle 13015 is moved. The slide potentiometer 13090 can be configured to detect the position of the detected element 13081 inside the longitudinal groove 13091 and transmit this position to the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 13010. For example, when the first actuator 13020 is in an open, inactive Assumption (FIG. 108), detectable element 13081 may be located at the proximal end of the longitudinal groove 13091 and 13090 potentiometer microprocessor may transmit a signal indicating to the microprocessor that the first actuator 13020 is in the open position. Using this information, the microprocessor can support the stop 13050 in the open position. When the first actuator 13020 is rotated toward the pistol grip 13016, the detected element 13081 can slide in the distal direction inside the longitudinal groove 13091. The potentiometer 13090 can transmit to the microprocessor a signal or a plurality of signals that can indicate the position of the first actuator 13020. In response to such a signal or a plurality of signals the microprocessor may actuate a closing motor 13105 to move the stop 13055 to a position corresponding to the position of the first actuator and 13020. When the first actuator 13020 is in the closed, fully activated position (FIG. 109), the detected element 13081 can be located at the distal end of the longitudinal groove 13091, and the potentiometer 13090 can transmit a signal to the microprocessor indicating to the microprocessor that the first actuator 13020 is in the closed position. Using this information, the microprocessor can move the stop 13050 to the closed position.

When the first actuator 13020 is pulled so that it is substantially adjacent to the pistol grip 13016 of the grip 13015, as described above, the cover fork rail 13080 moves to its extreme distal position. When the closing fork rail 13080 is in an extreme distal position, the closing system release button 13140 can come into contact with the closing fork rail 13080 and hold the closing fork rail 13080 in the extreme distal position, as a result of which the stop 13050 is held in a closed position with the possibility of release. As shown mainly in FIG. 108, the release system closing button 13140 can be mounted on the handle 13015 to rotate around the hinge 13141. The release system closing button 13140 may include a locking arm 13142 extending from it. When the first actuator 13120 is in an inactive position and the closing fork rail 13080 is in the extreme proximal position, the locking arm 13142 may be located above and / or adjacent to the upper surface of the closing fork rail 13080. In this position, the closing fork rail 13080 may slide relative to the locking arm 13142. In some situations, the locking arm 13142 may be biased toward the upper surface of the locking fork rail 13080. As will be described in more detail below, the tool 13010 may further comprise a locking member 13290 configured to hold releasably the first actuator 13020 and the second actuator 13030 in the inactive configuration shown in FIG. 108. Between the lock 13290 and the release button 13140, a spring 13150 can be provided that can pivotably rotate the release button of the closing system button 13140 around the hinge 13141 and place the locking arm 13142 close to the upper surface of the rail 13080 of the closing fork. In various embodiments, the implementation of the locking element 13290 may include a proximal protrusion 13296, and releasing the closing system button 13140 may include a distal protrusion 13146, which can be configured to hold and align the spring 13150 in position between the locking element 13290 and releasing the closing system button 13140. When the first actuator 13020 is rotated to the activated position, as shown in FIG. 109, the closing fork rail 13080 may be in an extreme distal position, and the locking arm 13142 may slide or fall into the notch 13082 formed at the proximal end of the closing fork rail 13080. Moreover, when moving the first actuator 13020 to the closed, or activated position shown in FIG. 109 and 110, the first actuator 13020 can push the locking element 13290 proximally and rotate the locking element 13290 around the hinge 13214. In at least one embodiment, the first actuator 13020 may include an activator protrusion 13025 extending therefrom, configured to interact with a distal protrusion 13295 extending from the locking element 13290. This movement of the locking element 13290 can compress the spring 13150 between the locking element 13290 and releasing the closing system button 13140 mu and increase the biasing force applied to closing system releasing button 13140. Once the locking arm 13142 is reacted with a cutout 13082, 13080 rake closing plug may lose the ability to move, or at least substantially move in the proximal direction or the distal direction.

As described above, the first actuator 13020 and the second actuator 13030 may be held releasably and / or shifted to the inactive position shown in FIG. 108. Tool 13010 may include a return spring 13210 including a first end connected to a hinge 13214 and a second end connected to a spring support 13034 extending from the second actuator 13030. The second actuator 13030 may be mounted on the handle 13015 can be rotated around the hinge 13021, and the return spring 13210 can apply a biasing force to the second actuator 13030 to rotate the second activator 13030 around the hinge 13021. The locking element 13290 can stop the rotation of the second actuator 13030 around the hinge 13021. More specifically, the spring 13150, the action of which is to introduce the release button closing the system 13140 into engagement with the rail 13080 of the closing fork, can also push the locking element 13290 distally so that the locking arm 13292 of the locking element 13290 will be behind the shoulder 13032 made on the second actuator 13030, which can limit the rotation of the second actuator 13030 and hold the second actuator gp 13030 in an unactivated position as illustrated in FIG. 108. As shown primarily in FIG. 110, the second actuator 13030 may include a shoulder 13031, which can be configured to abut the gear portion 13070 of the first actuator 13020 and move the first actuator 13020 to an inactive position (FIG. 108). When the first actuator 13020 rotates toward the activated position (FIG. 109), the first actuator 13020 can at least partially rotate the second actuator 13030 toward the pistol grip 13016 against the biasing force generated by the spring 13210. In fact, the activation of the first actuator 13020 can make the second actuator 13030 available to the user of the surgical instrument 13010. Prior to activating the first activator 13020, the second actuator gp 13030 may not be available to the user. In any case, the reader remembers that activation of the first actuator 13020 pushes the locking element 13295 proximally. Such proximal movement of the locking element 13295 may displace the locking element 13295 from a position behind the shoulder 13032 formed in the second actuator 13030.

As soon as the first actuator 13020 has moved and been locked in the fully activated position (FIG. 109), and the stop 13050 has moved to the closed position, as described above, the tool 13010 can be used to sew the fabric between the stop 13050 and the cassette 13055 with staples. If the user is not satisfied with the location of the fabric between the stop 13050 and the cassette 13055 with brackets, the user can unlock the stop 13050 by pressing the release button of the closing system 13140. When the release button of the closing system is pressed, the button 13140 of the release button 13142 of the release closing system can turn upward from the slot 13082 , which may allow the rail 13080 of the closing fork to move proximally. In addition, the return spring 13210 may return the first actuator 13120 and the second actuator 13130 to the inactive positions shown in FIG. 109 and, due to the gear interaction between the gear portion 13070 and the closing fork rail 13080, the return spring 13210 can return the closing fork rail 13080 back to the proximal position. This movement of the closing fork rail 13080 can be detected by a slider potentiometer 13090, which can signal the microprocessor of tool 13010 that the first actuator 13020 has returned to an inactive position and that the stop 13050 should be returned to its open position. As a result, the microprocessor can cause the closure motor 13105 to rotate in the second direction, move the closure nut of the closure system proximally, and pull the closure tube 13125 proximal, whereby the stop 13050 returns to the open position. Then, the user can change the position of the stop 13050 and the cassette 13055 with brackets and close the stop 13050 again, activating the first actuator 13020. In various embodiments, the microprocessor of the tool 13010 can be configured to ignore the input signals from the second actuator 13030 until potentiometer 13090 will not detect that stop 13050 is in a closed or substantially closed position.

When the user is satisfied with the position of the stop 13050 and the cassette 13055 with brackets, in addition to the above, the user can pull the second actuator 13030 to the closed or activated position so that it is in close proximity to the first actuator 13020. The activation of the second actuator 13030 can lead to pressing or closing the start switch 13180 in the handle 13015. In various embodiments, the start switch 13180 may be held by a fastener 13102 of the actuator, which can also be configured to hold the closing motor 13105 and / or the starting motor 13100. Closing the start switch 13180 may actuate the starting motor 13100. In some embodiments, the starting switch 13180 may be in communication to transmit a signal to the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 13010 . When the microprocessor receives a signal from the start switch 13180 that the second actuator 13030 is sufficiently activated, the microprocessor may signal and the starting motor 13100. In various embodiments, the closure of the starting switch 13180 can connect the starting motor 13100 directly to a direct or alternating current power supply for driving the starting motor 13100. In at least one embodiment, the starting switch 13180 can be positioned as follows that the start switch 13180 will not close until the second actuator 13030 reaches a fully closed position. As shown primarily in FIG. 110, the rotation of the second actuator 13030 can be stopped in the fully closed position when it comes into contact with the first actuator 13020. In at least one such embodiment, the first actuator 13020 may include a locking recess 13023 configured to receive a locking a protrusion 13033 extending from the second actuator 13030 when the second actuator 13030 reaches the closed position.

Starting engine 13100 may include a rotational output barrel that is operatively cooperative with the starting lead screw 13190 of the starting system. When the starting motor 13100 is driven by rotating its output barrel in a first direction, the output barrel can rotate the starting lead screw 13190 in a first direction. When the starting motor 13100 is driven by rotating its output barrel in a second, opposite direction, the output barrel can rotate the starting lead screw 13190 in a second direction. The starter system may further comprise a starter nut in threaded engagement with the threaded portion of the starter screw 13190. The starter nut may not be able to rotate with the starter screw 13190 so that the rotation of the starter screw 13190 allows the starter to be moved proximally or distally into depending on the direction of rotation of the starting lead screw 13190. The starting system may further comprise a starting barrel 13220, functionally connected to the starting th nut, which may slip with the starting nut. The starter system may also include a scalpel holder 13200 and staple-release strips that extend distally from the trigger barrel 13220. When the trigger engine 13020 is rotated in a first direction, the trigger screw 13190 can bias the trigger nut, trigger barrel 13220, the scalpel holder 13200 and the trigger strips distally pushing the staples out of the cassette 13055 with staples and cutting the fabric located between the stop 13050 and the cassette 13055 with staples. As soon as the scalpel 13200 and the launch strips reach the end of their stroke, the microprocessor can rotate the start motor 13100 in the second, opposite direction, returning the scalpel 13200 and the tracks to their original position. In various embodiments, tool 13010 may include an end-of-stroke sensor in communication with a microprocessor for transmitting a signal, and providing a signal to the microprocessor that the start drive has reached the end of the start stroke and that the start cycle should be performed in the opposite direction. Such an end-of-stroke sensor may be located, for example, in a stop 13050 and / or in a cassette 13055 with brackets. In some embodiments, an angular position sensor operatively coupled to the trigger motor 13100 can determine that the trigger motor 13100 has made enough revolutions so that the scalpel 13200 and the trigger strips reach the end of their travel and can signal the microprocessor that the trigger system needs to be pulled.

However, after activating the second actuator 13030, the tool 13010 is in the starting state, and the microprocessor can be configured to ignore any input signals from the first actuator 13020 and / or the slider potentiometer 13090 until the trigger system returns to its original position. In various embodiments, the tool 13010 may include a cancel button, which, when pressed, can send a signal to the microprocessor that the trigger assembly should immediately be pulled off. In at least one such embodiment, the start sequence can be stopped by pressing the release button of the closing system 13140. As indicated above, pressing the release button of the closing system 13140 moves the closing fork rail 13080 proximally, which in turn moves the detecting element 13081 proximally. The proximal movement of the detected element 13081 can be detected by a slider potentiometer 13090, which can give the microprocessor a signal to change the direction of rotation of the trigger motor 13100 to retract the trigger assembly and / or actuate the closing motor 13105 to open the stop 13050.

Tool 13010 may also include one or more indicators, such as, for example, LED 13300, configured to indicate the operating status of tool 13010. In various embodiments, LED 13300 can operate, for example, similarly to LED 11100. Tool 13010 also has a hinge capability turning the end effector 13012. This is accomplished by the hinge handle 13240, as described in US Pat. No. 5,704,534. The manual rotation of the barrel assembly 13040 is also described in US Pat. No. 5,704,534.

In the modular design of the tool 13010, the barrel assembly 13040 and the end effector 13012 may be disposable and may be attached to the refillable handle 13015. In another embodiment, the emphasis 13050 and the cassette 13055 with brackets are disposable, and the barrel assembly 13040 and handle 13015 are reusable. In various embodiments, the end effector 13012, including an emphasis 13015, a barrel assembly 13040 and a handle 13015, can be reusable, and the cassette 13055 with brackets can be replaceable.

In FIG. 111 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument 14010. The instrument 14010 may comprise an actuator or handle 14020, a stem portion 14030, a cassette tubular body 14040 and an abutment 14050. The instrument 14010 may further include a closure system configured to move the abutment 14050 between the open position and closed position. The actuator 14020 may include a rotary closing handle 14075, which may actuate the closing system, as further described in more detail below. Tool 14010 may also include a starter system configured to eject staples that are stored and retrievable in a cartridge case 14040. The actuator 14020 may further comprise an activation trigger 14070, which may actuate the trigger system, as further described below in more detail. The barrel portion 14030, the cassette body 14040, and the emphasis 14050 can operate in a manner similar to that shown and described in US Pat. No. 5,292,053, entitled “SURGICAL SEWING TOOL FOR ANASTOMOSIS”, issued March 8, 1994. Description of US Patent No. 5,292,053, entitled “KHIRISHIRI TOOL FOR ANASTOMOSIS ”, issued March 8, 1994, is fully incorporated herein by reference.

In addition to the above, the actuator 14020 may include a transmission 14000 and a slider button 14060 configured to drive the transmission 14000. The slider button 14060 is configured to move between a distal position (FIG. 115), which is closer to the cassette body 14040, and proximal position (FIG. 114), which is further from the cassette body 14040. When the slider button 14060 is in the proximal position, the actuator 14020 is in the first operating mode, or closing mode, and can move the stop 14050 to and from the cassette body 14040. When the slider button 14060 is in a distal position, the actuator 14020 is in the second operating mode, or start mode, and can push the brackets from the cassette body 14040 to the stop 14050. When the actuator 14020 is in the closing mode, the rotary closing handle 14075 can be rotated around the longitudinal axis passing through the actuator 14020, moving the emphasis 14050 proximally or distally, depending on the direction of rotation of the closing handle 14075. When the actuator 14020 is in Skov mode, the trigger can be turned 14070 proximally to eject the staples from the cartridge body 14040. The closing system and the starting system are described in detail below.

The actuator 14020 may include an electric motor, such as an engine 14090 (FIG. 113-115), which can actuate a closing drive and a starting actuator via a transmission 14000. The motor 14090 can be held inside the housing 14080 of the actuator 14020. As shown mainly in FIG. . 113, the actuator housing 14080 may comprise two halves, a right half of the actuator housing 14080a and a left half of the actuator housing 14080b. The actuator housing halves 14080a and 14080b may be screwed, although any suitable fasteners and / or adhesive may be used to assemble the actuator housing 14080. An engine 14090 may be held between the actuator housing halves 14080a and 14080b, and may include a rotatable barrel 14100 that extends distally from it. In some embodiments, the actuator 14020 may include an engine mount 14101 located within the housing 14080 and configured to hold the engine housing 14100 and prevent rotation of the engine housing relative to the actuator housing 14080. In various embodiments, the rotatable barrel 14100 may include an extension portion 14110 attached thereto. The shaft 14100 and the extension portion 14110 can be rotatably connected so that they can rotate together.

In addition to the foregoing, as shown primarily in FIG. 116, the extension portion 14110 may comprise a cylindrical or at least substantially cylindrical main element 14111 and a flat portion 14120 formed at the distal end 14113 of the extension portion 14110. The cylindrical main element 14111 of the extension portion 14110 can be rotatably held inside the actuator housing 14080 by bearing 14105. The distal end 14113 of the extension portion 14110 may be located inside the hole 14114 formed in the slider 14115. The slider 14115, as will be further described in more detail below, is part of the transmission 14000, and can switch between the proximal position (FIG. 114), in which the slider 14115 transfers the rotational movement of the engine 14090 to the closing system, and the distal position (FIG. 115), in which the slider 14115 transfers the rotational moving the engine 14090 to the starting system. By moving the slider 14115 between the proximal position (FIG. 114) and the distal position (FIG. 115), the slider 14115 can slide relative to the extension portion 14110. The hole 14114 formed in the slider 14115 can form a perimeter corresponding to or at least substantially corresponding to the perimeter the distal end 14113 of the extension portion 14110, so that, firstly, the extension portion 14110 and the slider 14115 are rotatably connected to each other and, secondly, the slider 14115 can move relative to the extension body part 14110. In at least one embodiment, the slider opening 14114 has a cylindrical section 14116 corresponding to the cylindrical main element 14111 of the extension part 14110, and a flat section 14117 corresponding to the flat section 14120 at the distal end 14113 of the slider 14115.

In addition to the above, the slider 14115 may have a tubular or substantially tubular construction. The slider 14115 may have a distal end 14118 and a plurality of outer circumferential slots 14130 extending around the outer surface of the distal end 14118, which can functionally interact with the trigger actuator, as shown in FIG. 115. The slider 14115 may comprise a plurality of internal circumferential slots 14140 formed at the distal end of the slider opening 14114 that can functionally interact with the closing drive, as shown in FIG. 114. Slider 14115 may be part of the slider assembly 14150. As shown primarily in FIG. 116, the slider assembly 14150 may further comprise an upper thrust bearing 14160, a lower thrust bearing 14170, a slider button 14060, and a slider spring 14180. The upper thrust bearing 14160 and the lower thrust bearing 14170 together form a thrust bearing, which can, firstly, hold the slider 14115 loosely enough so that the slider 14115 can rotate inside the thrust bearing, and, secondly, move the slider 14115 proximally and distally. As shown mainly in FIG. 116, the slider 14115 may have a distal flange 14121 and a proximal flange 14122 extending from it, between which a recess 14123 may be formed, which is formed with the ability to firmly receive a support bearing therein. By pressing the button 14060 of the slider, the distally support bearing can abut against the distal flange 14121 and push the slider 14115 distally. Accordingly, when the slider button 14060 is pressed, the proximal support bearing can abut against the proximal flange 14122 and push the slider 14115 proximally.

The node node 14150 may contain a fuse made with the possibility of holding the slider 14115 in one place with the possibility of release. As shown mainly in FIG. 116, the slider button 14060 may comprise a flange 14181 that can selectively fit into a first recess formed at a first or proximal end of a longitudinal groove in actuator housing 14080 and a second recess formed at a second or distal end of the longitudinal groove. When the flange 14181 interacts with the proximal recess, the flange 14181 can hold the slider assembly 14150 in the proximal position, in which the slider 14115 and the closing actuator functionally interact with the motor 14090. When the flange 14181 interacts with the distal recess, the flange 14181 can hold the slider assembly 14150 in the distal position in which the slider 14115 and the starting actuator functionally interact with the engine 14090. The upper thrust bearing 14160 may include a bearing hole 14161 made with possibly In addition, it is possible to slide the barrel 14061 of the button 14060 into it. The button 14060 can be pressed down into the bearing bore 14161 to release the flange 14181 from the actuator housing 14080. Once the flange 14181 is released from the actuator housing 14080, the button 14060 can enter the longitudinal groove in the actuator housing 14080 and move the slider 14115 between the proximal and distal positions. Spring 14180 may be configured to bias flange 14181 toward actuator housing 14080, and when the user of surgical instrument 14010 releases button 14060, spring 14180 may again bias button 14060 upward in cooperation with actuator housing 14080.

When the slider assembly 14150 is in a proximal position, in addition to the foregoing, the slider 14115 interacts with the closing nut 14190 of the closing drive. The cover nut 14190 includes an elongated tubular structure including the external splines 14200 of the cover nut formed at its proximal end. When the slider 14115 is in the proximal position, the internal slots 14140 of the slider 14115 engage in gearing with the external slots 14200 of the closing nut 14190 so that when the slider 14115 is rotated by the engine 14090, the closing nut 14190 is rotated by the slider 14115. The closing nut 14190 can be held inside with the possibility of being held actuator housing 14080 by means of one or more bearings, for example, a plain bearing 14220, which rotatably holds the distal end by closing 14190. guide nut sliding bearings 14220 closing nut may be formed of, e.g., Delrin, nylon, copper, brass, bronze and / or carbon. In some embodiments, the closing nut bearing 14220 may be, for example, a ball bearing or a roller bearing. In various embodiments, the closing nut bearing 14220 may be integral with the actuator housing 14080.

The closure nut 14190 may include a longitudinal channel 14191. The closure system may further comprise a closure rod 14230, which may at least partially be located within the longitudinal channel 14191. The closure rod 14230 may comprise a thread 14231 in threaded connection with the thread 14210 of the closure nut formed in the longitudinal channel 14191. The closure rod 14230 may not be able to rotate with the closure nut 14190, so that when the closure nut 14190 is rotated in the first direction by two tor 14090 14230 closing rod can move forward by closing nut 14190 proximally. As shown in FIG. 115, the closure rod 14230 can move proximally inside the longitudinal channel 14191 of the closure nut 14190. Similarly, when the closure nut 14190 is rotated in the opposite second direction by the motor 14090, the closure rod 14230 can translationally move by means of the closure nut 14190 distally. As will be described in more detail below, the closure rod 14230 can functionally cooperate with the stop 14050 so that during proximal movement of the closure rod 14230, the stop 14050 can move toward the cassette body 14040. Accordingly, during distal movement of the closing rod 14230, the stop 14050 can move from the cassette body 14040. In various embodiments, the length of the closing stroke of the closing system can be measured between the open position and the closed position of the stop 14050. The closing rod 14230 may have a length at least equal to the length of the closing stroke to match it.

As described above, the actuator button 14060 14040 is movable between the proximal position (FIG. 114), in which the transmission 14000 is connected to the closing actuator, and the distal position (FIG. 115), in which the transmission 14000 is connected to the starting actuator. Thus, the transmission 14000 can be used to selectively connect the closing drive and the starting drive to the motor 14090. When the user of the surgical instrument 14010 is satisfied with the position of the stop 14050 relative to the cassette body 14040, the user can shift the button 14060 distally, as shown in FIG. 115 to release the slider 14115 from the closing drive and establish the interaction of the slider 14115 with the starting drive. When the slider 14115 slides distally, the inner slots 14140 of the slider 14115 are disconnected from the outer slots 14200 of the closing nut 14190 so that the subsequent rotation of the slider 14115 is no longer transmitted to the closing nut 14190 and the closing system. In parallel with the release of the slider from the closing system, the slider 14115 may interact with the launch system. In an alternative embodiment, the slider 14115 may be released from the closing system by distally displacing the slider 14115, and due to the additional distal displacement of the slider 14115, the slider 14115 can interact with the start system. In such situations, the 14000 transmission cannot simultaneously functionally couple the closing system and the start system to the 14090 engine. In any case, the trigger system may include a trigger nut 14260, which can interact with the slider 14115 while distally moving the slider 14115.

In addition to the above, as shown primarily in FIG. 116, the starting nut 14260 may include an opening 14261 formed therein, which may be configured to receive the distal end 14118 of the slider 14115 while sliding the slider 14115 to its distal position (FIG. 115). Hole 14261 of the starting nut may include slots 14270 of the starting nut formed on its inner circumference, which can engage with the slots 14130 located on the outer circumference of the slider 14115. When the slots 14130 of the outer circumference of the slider 14115 interact with the slots 14270 of the starting nut 14260, slider 14115 can be rotatably connected to the starting nut 14260 so that the rotation of the slider 14115 is transmitted to the starting nut 14260. The actuator 14020 may further comprise a bearing nut bearing 14275, I hold rotary 14260. The starting nut bearing 14275 may be a needle bearing, a delrin, nylon and / or other plastic bearing, a metal bearing, or it may be, for example, part of the actuator housing 14080. The starter nut 14260 may further comprise an internal thread 14272 formed on the distal inner surface of the starter hole 14261. The starter system may further comprise a starter tube 14280 in threaded interaction with the internal thread 14272 of the starter nut 14260.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the starter tube 14280 may include a thread 14281 formed on its outer surface that is threadedly connected to the female thread 14272. The starter tube 14280 may not be able to rotate with the starter nut 14260 so that when turning the starting nut 14260 through the engine 14090 and the slider 14115, the starting nut 14260 can translationally move the starting tube 14280. For example, when turning the starting nut 14260 in the first direction, the starting tube 14280 can bias be distal through the starter nut 14260, and when the starter nut 14260 is rotated in a second, opposite direction, the starter tube 14280 can be displaced proximally by the starter nut 14260. At least a portion of the starter tube 14280 may be located inside the hole 14261 formed in the starter nut 14260. With the proximal displacement of the starter tube 14280, the starter tube 14280 can move proximally inside the hole 14261. With distal displacement of the starter tube 14280, the starter tube 14280 can move distally inside the hole 14261. As will be described in more detail below, the trigger tube 14280 may be operatively connected to a trigger element capable of pushing the brackets out of the cassette body 14040 while extending the trigger tube 14280 distally. The trigger tube 14280 may retract the trigger when the trigger tube 14280 moves proximally. The trigger tube 14280 may be long enough to provide a trigger for the trigger when moving the trigger between inactive and activated positions. In various embodiments, the threaded portion of the starting tube 14280 is shorter than the threaded portion of the closing rod 14230. In such circumstances, the starting cycle may be shorter than the closing cycle. In other embodiments, the threaded portion of the starter tube 14280 may have the same length as the threaded portion of the closing rod 14230. In such embodiments, the starting cycle may have the same length as the closing cycle. In some embodiments, the threaded portion of the starter tube 14280 is longer than the threaded portion of the closing rod 14230. In such circumstances, the starting cycle may be longer than the closing cycle.

In addition to the above, the actuator 14020 and the stem portion 14030 may be a single system. In various embodiments, actuator 14020 and stem portion 14030 may be a single unit. In some embodiments, actuator 14020 may be disassembled from stem portion 14030. In FIG. 34 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument 14010 representing an actuator 14020 disassembled from the stem portion 14030. The instrument 14010 may include one or more locking elements or latches configured to detachably hold the stem portion 14030 on the actuator 14020. For example, the actuator 14020 may include, on its opposite sides, latches 14025 configured to releasably hold the stem portion 14030 to an actuator m mechanism 14020. The latches 14025 can slide between the first position in which they interact with the stem portion 14030, and the second position in which they are released from the stem portion 14030. As described in more detail below, the actuator 14020 and the stem portion 14030 may contain sections closing systems that are functionally assembled during the assembly of the stem portion 14030 with the actuator 14020. Similarly, the actuator 14020 and the stem portion 14030 may contain sections of the launch system, which matured functionally assembled together during assembly of stem portion 14030 to 14020 activator.

In addition to the above, as shown primarily in FIG. 113, the closure system may further comprise a closure fastener 14240 attached to the distal end of the closure rod 14230. In various embodiments, a screw may block the closure fixer 14240 on the closure rod 14230 so that the closure fixer 14240 translationally moves distally while translating the closure rod 14230. distally and, accordingly, translationally moves proximally with the translational movement of the closing rod 14230 proximally. The closure latch 14240 may include one or more lateral protrusions that may fit into the troughs of the actuator body 14080 to align the closure latch 14240 and the closure rod 14230. The lateral lugs can also prevent the closure rod 14230 and the closure latch 14240 from turning when the closure rod 14230 moves by means of a closing nut 14190, as described above. The closing locking member 14240 may comprise an output element of the closing actuator actuator 14020 and may be attached to the input element of the closing actuator of the stem portion 14030. The input element of the closing drive of the stem portion 14030 may comprise a second locking part 14250 that may be attached to the locking locking part 14240 during assembly the stem portion 14030 on the actuator 14020. The closing retainer 14240 may push the second retainer 14250 distally distal nomination closing detent closing rod parts 14240 14230; accordingly, the closing retainer 14240 can pull the second retainer 14250 proximally by pulling the closure retainer 14240 proximal with the locking rod 14230.

The closing drive portion of the stem portion 14030 may further comprise one or more coupling clamps 14252 and 14253 that are attached to and extend from the second retainer part 14250. The coupling clamps 14252 and 14253 can be attached to the second locking part 14250 so that the second locking part 14250 can push the coupling clamps 14252, 14253 distally when the second locking part 14250 extends distally by the closing locking part 14240 and, accordingly, so that the second locking part 14250 can pull the tie rods 14252, 14253 proximally when the second retainer part 14250 is proximal retracted by the closure retainer part 14240. In various embodiments, the stem portion 14030 may be curved and in at least one embodiment, may include a curved barrel body 14031 extending from the proximal body fastener 14032. In some embodiments, the tie clamps 14252 and 14253 may be flexible so as to adapt to the curved path of the portion of the stem drive of the stem portion 14030. The portion of the stem drive of the stem portion of 14030 may further comprise a mounting portion, or trocar 14258, attached to the tie clamps 14253 and 14253. The trocar can be attached to the coupling clamps 14252, 14253 so that the trocar 14258 extends and retracts together with the coupling clamps 14252, 14253. The trocar 14258 may contain a distal end, which can be made with possible the detachable interaction with the stop 14050 so that the stop 14050 extends and retracts along with the trocar 14258 when the stop 14050 is assembled on the trocar 14258. In the aforementioned US patent No. 5,292,503 this is described in more detail.

In addition to the above, as shown mainly in FIG. 113, the trigger system may further comprise a trigger retainer 14290 attached to the distal end of the trigger tube 14280. In various embodiments, the screw may block the trigger retainer 14290 on the trigger tube 14280 so that the trigger retainer 14290 translationally moves distally with the translational movement of the trigger tube 14280 distally and, accordingly, translationally moves proximally while translationally moving the launch tube 14280 proximally. The trigger latch 14290 may include one or more lateral protrusions that fit into the grooves 14080 of the actuator housing to align the trigger latch 14290 and the trigger tube 14280. The lateral lugs can also prevent the trigger tube 14280 and the trigger latch 14290 from turning when the trigger tube 14280 moves by starting nut 14260, as described above. The trigger retainer 14290 may include an output actuator trigger actuator 14020 and may be attached to the trigger actuator input portion of the stem portion 14030. The trigger trigger actuator input portion of the stem portion 14030 may comprise a second retainer portion 14300 that may be attached to the trigger retainer 14290 during assembly the stem portion 14030 on the actuator 14020. The trigger retainer 14290 can be mated on the tongue-in-gutter principle with a second trigger retainer part 14300. In the assembled state, the trigger retainer 14290 can push the second retainer 14300 distally while distally extending the trigger retainer 14290 with the trigger tube 14280; accordingly, the trigger retainer 14290 can pull the second retainer 14300 proximal when retracting the trigger retainer 14290 proximally with the trigger tube 14280.

The trigger actuator may further comprise a bracket ejector 14310 connected to the second retainer 14300 so that the bracket ejector 14310 moves proximally and distally together with the second retainer 14300. When moving the bracket ejector 14310 distally through the second retainer 14300, the bracket ejector 14310 can eject the brackets cases 14040 cassettes. In various embodiments, the second locking part 14300 can distally extend the scalpel 14320 together with the ejector 14310 staples for cutting tissue, caught between the emphasis 14050 and the body 14040 of the cartridge. The second locking part 14300 can retract the ejector 14310 staples and the scalpel 14320 proximally when the second locking part 14300 is proximal retracted by the trigger locking part 14290.

In addition to the above, it can be noted that parts of the closing system comprising the closing nut 14190 and the closing rod 14230, as well as parts of the starting system containing the starting nut 14260 and the starting tube 14280, can be concentric and integrated. The starter nut 14260 and the starter tube 14280 can be considered an external mechanism, and the closing nut 14190 and the closing rod 14 230 can be considered an internal mechanism. Together with the slider 14115, the closing nut 14190, the closing rod 14230, the starting nut 14260 and the starting tube 14280 can form a transmission 14000. Concentric and integrated transmission design 14000 can reduce the space occupied by the closing and starting systems and create a smaller actuator 14020, more comfortable to hold. This design also allows the external mechanism to support and provide bearing surfaces for the moving parts of the internal mechanism. In the present embodiment, the translationally moving elements of the internal mechanism are shown longer than the translationally moving elements of the external mechanism. The closing rod 14230, for example, may have a length of the order of five centimeters (two inches), and the launch tube 14280 may have a length of, for example, the order of two and a half centimeters (one inch); however, any suitable length may be used. Longer moving elements are suitable if a longer moving distance is required. In the presented embodiments, the internal mechanism or closing drive can move the load a greater distance than the external mechanism or the starting drive. In other words, the closing drive can move the load further than the starting drive.

As described above, the actuator 14020 and the stem portion 14030 are designed to be easily assembled. The trigger retainer 14290 has a semicircular protrusion at the end of the distally protruding flange. This semicircular protrusion enters the semicircular groove at the proximal end of the second trigger retainer 14300. Since the connection is on a semicircular surface, you can connect the trigger retainer 14290 to the second trigger retainer 14300 by moving the trigger retainer 14290 to the second trigger retainer 14300 in the direction transverse or perpendicular to the common longitudinal axis of these parts. The connection of the parts of the closing assembly is also facilitated in substantially the same manner. For example, the closing retainer 14240 may include a distally extending flange. At the distal end of this flange, there is a semicircular protrusion extending from the substantially semicircular portion of the closure fastener 14240. An annular groove at the proximal portion of the second fastener 14250 receives this semicircular protrusion and attaches the closure fastener 14240 to the second fastener 14250. Given the semicircular shape of the closure fastener parts 14240 covering the locking part 14240 and the second locking part 14250 can be assembled and disassembled by translational movement, transverse or ne the perpendicular common longitudinal axis of these parts, which facilitates rapid connection and disconnection of stem portion 14030 and actuator 14020.

As essentially shown in FIG. 113, the trigger 14070 and the closing handle 14075 are further shown with a spatial separation of the components in order to better see their interaction with adjacent parts. The closing handle 14075 is rotatable in a first direction, clockwise, and in a second direction, counterclockwise. By turning the closing handle 14075 in the first direction, the closing handle 14075 can come into contact and close the first switch, and by turning the closing handle 14075 in the second direction, the closing handle 14075 can make contact and close the second switch. When the first switch is closed with the closing handle 14075, power can be supplied to the engine 14090 and it can work in the first direction, and when the second switch is closed with the closing handle, power can be supplied to the engine 14090 and it can work in the second direction. When the engine 14090 is operating in the first direction, the engine 14090 can move the closing rod 14230 distally to move the stop 14050 from the cartridge case 14040, and when the engine 14090 is in the second direction, the engine 14090 can move the closing rod 14230 proximally to move the stop 14050 to the cartridge case 14040 . The closing handle 14075 may be arranged to be installed in a central or neutral position in which neither the first switch nor the second switch are closed and the engine 14090 does not respond to the closing handle 14075. In various embodiments, the tool 14010 may include at least one spring, such as, for example, a spring 14076 configured to bias the closing handle 14075, for example, in a neutral position.

Turning to the trigger 14070, the trigger 14070 is pivotally coupled to the actuator housing 14080 rotatably and is spring loaded with a torsion spring 14071, which places the trigger 14070 in a position that is rotated from the actuator housing 14080. The trigger switch 14305, located near the trigger 14070, is in a position that allows it to come into contact with the trigger 14070 when the trigger 14070 is rotated to the actuator housing 14080 against the action of the torsion spring 14071. The trigger 14070 can close the trigger 14305 when activated the trigger 14070. When the trigger switch 14305 is closed, the engine 14090 can operate in the first direction, pushing the trigger tube 14280 and the ejector 14310 staples distally. When the trigger 14070 is released, the torsion spring 14071 can move the trigger 14070 back to the inactive position, bringing it out of contact with the trigger 14305. At this point, the trigger 14305 may not be closed and the engine 14090 may not respond to the trigger 14070. B in various embodiments, tool 14010 may further comprise a safety latch 14320 pivotally coupled to an actuator housing 14080, and which may rotate between a locked position in which the trigger 14070 cannot be activated, and a second position in which the trigger 14070 can be activated to close the trigger switch 14035. In any case, the engine 14090 can operate in the second direction by pulling the trigger tube 14280 and the ejector 14310 staples. In some embodiments, the engine 14090 can be switched between the first direction of rotation and the second direction of rotation when the starting system reaches the end of its starting cycle. In some embodiments, actuator 14020 may further comprise a reverse button and a switch that may be actuated to operate the engine 14090 in a second direction.

In light of the foregoing, a method for using tool 14010 is provided below, although any suitable method may be used. In addition, it is described above that the actuator 14020 is able to provide two outputs, and the stem section 14030 is able to accept two inputs to perform two functions. These functions are described as a closing function and a starting function, but the invention is not limited to this. The functions may include any suitable functions, such as, for example, a swivel function. To use the actuator 14020 in various embodiments, the user may first assemble the actuator 14020 with the stem portion 14030 by moving the actuator 14020 toward the stem portion 14030 perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the actuator 14020, as seen in FIG. 112. The user can align the open side of the proximal end of the stem portion 14030 with the open side of the distal portion of the actuator 14020 and connect these parts together. This assembly allows you to connect the closing and starting locking parts, as described above. As also described above, the latches 14025 on the activator 14020 can grab the flanges on the barrel portion housing 14032 and hold the actuator 14020 and the stem portion 14030 together with the possibility of release. After assembling the actuator 14020 and the stem portion 14030, the user can move the slider assembly 14150 to the first position to apply the first desired function of the surgical instrument and the attached part. As described above, a button 14060 can be used to move the slider assembly 14150 to the first position.

As shown mainly in FIG. 114, the internal slots 14140 on the slider 14115 can interact with the external slots 14200 of the closing nut 14190 when the slider assembly 14150 is in the first position. The user can then rotate the closing handle 14075 to position the stop 14050 relative to the cassette body 14040. As described above, the closing handle 14075 can be rotated in the first direction, closing the first closing switch and moving the stop 14050 from the cassette body 14040, and in the second direction, closing the second closing switch and moving the stop 14050 to the cassette body 14040. In some embodiments, closing the first closing switch may result in closing the circuit driving the engine 14090 in the first direction, and accordingly, closing the second closing switch may lead to closing the circuit driving the engine 14090 in the second direction. In some embodiments, the first closing switch and the second closing switch can communicate with the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 14010, which can control the power supply, including the polarity of the supplied power, to the motor 14090 based on the input signal from the first closing switch and the second closing switch. As described above, the engine 14090 can rotate the rotatable barrel 14100, the extension section 14110, the slider 14115 and, thanks to the design of the transmission 14000, the closing nut 14190. As described above, the closing nut 14190 is in threaded interaction with the closing rod 14230, which moves the stop 14050 proximally and distally. Alternatively, the closing rod 14230 may perform some other function.

When the slider assembly 14150 is in the first, proximal position, as shown in FIG. 114, the engine 14090 may respond to the closing handle 14075, but not to the trigger 14070. In at least one embodiment, the lower thrust bearing 14170 of the slider assembly 14150 may contact and close the first transmission switch 14340 when the slider assembly 14150 is in the first position . In various embodiments, the first transmission switch 14340 may communicate with the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 14010, which may be configured to ignore the input from the start switch 14305 when the first transmission switch 14340 is closed. In such circumstances, the user of the surgical instrument 14010 may press the trigger 14070, but the engine 14090 will not respond to this. Instead, in such circumstances, the engine 14090 responds to the first and second closing switches activated by the closing handle 14075 to move the stop 14050. When the slider assembly 14150 is moved to the second or distal position, as shown in FIG. 115, the lower support bearing 14170 is released from interaction with the first transmission switch 14340, and the first transmission switch 14340 is returned to the open state. When moving the slider assembly 14150 to the second or distal position, the lower pillow block bearing 14170 can come into contact and close the second transmission switch 14350. In various embodiments, the second transmission switch 14350 may communicate with the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 14010, which may be configured to ignore the input signal from the closing handle 14075 when the second transmission switch 14350 is closed. In such circumstances, the user of the surgical instrument 14010 may rotate the closing handle 14075, but the engine 14090 will not respond to this. Instead, in such circumstances, the engine 14090 responds to the start switch 14305 activated by the start hook 14070.

To move the slider unit 14150 from the first position to the second position, as described above, the user can press the slider button 14060 to release the button 14060 from the stopper and move the slider unit 14150 distally to the second position. In such circumstances, the slider 14115 can be released from the interaction with the closing nut 14160 and enter into interaction with the starting nut 14260. More specifically, the internal slots 14140 on the slider 14115 can be released from the interaction with the external slots 14200 on the closing nut 14190 and, moreover, the external slots 14130 of the slider 14150 can interact with the internal splines 14270 of the release nut 14260. At this point, the user can turn the safety latch 14320 to the unlocked position to prepare the release 14070 mechanisms still to run. The user can start the launch system by turning the trigger 14070 counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 115 towards the housing 14080 of the actuator. As described above, the trigger 14070 can come into contact with the trigger 14305, which can supply power to the engine 14090. Similar to the first transmission configuration 14000, the engine 14090 can rotate the rotatable barrel 14100, extension section 14110 and slider 14115; however, in the second transmission configuration 14000, the slider 14115 rotates the start nut 14260 and progressively moves the start tube 14280.

In various embodiments, power to the instrument 14010 may be supplied from an external power source. In some embodiments, one or more batteries located within the actuator 14020 may be used. The batteries may be, for example, lithium batteries. In some embodiments, the batteries and motor 14090 may be housed in a sealed, removable housing that can be cleaned, sterilized, and reusable.

After using the actuator 14020 during surgery, the user can disassemble the actuator 14020 from the stem portion 14030. To disassemble the actuator 14020 from the stem portion 14030, the user can press the latches 14025. After that, the actuator 14020 can be cleaned, sterilized and reused recycling. Similarly, stem portion 14030 may be cleaned, sterilized, and reused or disposed of. If the stem portion 14030 is reused, the brackets can be reloaded into the cartridge case 14040. In some embodiments, the cartridge case 14040 may include a removable cartridge that can be used to reload the clips. In various embodiments, various parts of the actuator 14020 can also be combined in a sealed, compartmented module that can be easily inserted into and removed from the actuator housing 14080. For example, an engine 14090, a rotatable barrel 14100, an extension portion 14110, a slider assembly 14150, a closing nut 14190, a closing rod 14230, a starting nut 14260 and a starting tube 14280 can be combined into a modular assembly that can be removed from the actuator body 14080. In addition, actuator parts 14020 may be included in separate assembled modules. For example, the electronic parts of the actuator 14020, such as the engine 14090 and the battery, can make up one module, and the mechanical parts containing the rotating and / or moving parts can make up the second module. In such circumstances, the first module can be sterilized by methods other than the second module. Such situations may facilitate the use of, for example, gamma radiation for the second module, which may not be suitable for sterilizing the first module.

Various additions to the actuator 14020 are provided. For example, microprocessor functions can be used to detect the end-of-stroke position of the closing and / or starting system and signaling the engine 14090 to stop the closing clock and / or starting clock. The microprocessor functions can also be used to determine the type of barrel assembly that is attached to the actuator 14020. For example, the actuator 14020 may include a sensor in communication for transmitting a signal to the microprocessor in the actuator 14020, signaling that it is connected to the actuator 14020 a stem assembly of a circular stapling instrument or that a stem assembly of a linear stapling instrument is attached to an actuator 14020 It is contemplated that actuator 14020 can provide power for many types of surgical instruments requiring, for example, at least one or possibly two input longitudinal movements. In various embodiments, actuator 14020 may provide operation, for example, of a circular stapling instrument, a linear stapling instrument, a rectangular stapling instrument, scissors, clamps and / or other types of surgical instruments.

Further modifications to the actuator 14020 include the use of multiple motors so that the number of functions that the actuator 14020 can apply can be increased. Some modifications to the actuator 14020 include performing more than two functions using a single engine. For example, a third position of the slider assembly 14150 is provided in which the third function is implemented by the third built-in mechanism. In some embodiments, in addition to the above, the slider assembly 14150 may have a third position, for example, a resting position or a neutral position in which the engine 14090 does not perform any function.

Additional modifications may include the use of electrical and / or magnetic methods for translating the slider 14115 from one position to another. For example, a solenoid may be used to move the slider 14115 from one position to another. The spring can previously move the slider 14115 to its original position, and applying power to the solenoid can move the slider 14115 from its original position to the second position.

Surgical stapling instrument 15010 is shown in FIG. 117 and 118. Similar to the above, the tool 15010 may include a handle closing the system, configured to move the stop 15090 between the open position (FIG. 117) and the closed position (FIG. 118) relative to the cartridge 15080 with brackets and, in addition, a trigger a system configured to accommodate staples from a cassette 15080 with staples and cutting tissue caught between the stop 15090 and the cassette 15080 with staples. The handle housing of the surgical instrument of FIG. 117 and 118 removed to show the components contained inside. Also similar to the aforementioned, the tool closing system 15010 may include a closing motor 15110, a closing gear block comprising a gear 15160 of a closing drive screw operably connected to a closing motor 15110, and a closing drive screw 15170 operably connected to the gear of the closing drive screw 15160. In various embodiments, the closing motor 15110 may be held by the engine frame 15125, which may also rotatably hold the closing drive screw gear 15160 and the closing drive spindle 15170. The closure system may further include a closure button 15065 configured to contact and close the closure switch 15285, which, when closed, can actuate the closure motor 15110. In some embodiments, in addition to the above, the closure button 15065 may be configured to the ability to come into contact with the closing switch, configured to actuate the closing motor 15110 in the first direction and close the stop 15090, and opening the switch ents adapted to actuate the closing motor 15110 in the second direction and open stop 15090.

In addition to the above, the closing system may also include a carriage 15180 configured to interact with the stop 15090 and move the stop 15090 between the open position (FIG. 117) and the closed position (FIG. 118). The carriage 15180 may include a threaded nut portion 15175 having a threaded connection to the threaded portion of the closing drive lead screw 15170. The carriage 15180 may not be able to rotate together with the lead screw 15170 of the closure drive so that the rotation of the lead screw 15170 of the closure drive can translationally move the carriage 15180 proximally and distally, depending on the direction of rotation of the lead screw 15170 of the closure drive. By turning the closing drive lead screw 15170 in the first direction by the closing motor 15110, the closing drive lead screw 15170 can displace the carriage 15180 distally, closing the stop 15090. Accordingly, by turning the closing drive screw 15170 in the second, opposite direction by the closing drive motor 15110, the closing drive screw 15170 can bias the carriage 15180 proximally, opening the stop 15090. The carriage 15180 can be at least partially located around the cassette channel 15070, and in the cing embodiments may be fixed to the slidable cartridge channel 15070. As shown primarily in FIG. 118, the cassette channel 15070 may include one or more grooves 15195 formed on its opposite sides, which are adapted to slide one or more protrusions 15185 extending inward from the carriage 15080. In other situations, the channel 15070 may include protrusions 15185 and the carriage 15080 may include grooves 15195. In any case, the grooves 15195 and the protrusions 15185 can be configured to limit the movement of the carriage 15180, for example, along a longitudinal or essentially longitudinal path.

The carriage 15080 can be moved from the first proximal position (FIG. 117) to the second, distal position (FIG. 118) to close the stop 15090. The carriage 15080 can include a transverse bar 15081 configured to engage and move the stop 15090 when moving the carriage 15080 relative to the stop 15090. In various embodiments, the stop 15090 can be rotatably connected to the cassette channel 15070 around the hinge 15200, and the stop 15090 can rotate around the hinge 15200 by means of the transverse bar 15081 of the carriage. More specifically, the carriage cross bar 15181 may be configured to come into contact with the upper or cam surface 15092 of the stop 15090 and slide along this upper surface 15092 as the carriage 15080 moves distally to rotate the stop 15090 toward the cassette 15080 located inside the channel 15070 cassettes. In some embodiments, the distal end 15091 of the stop 15090 may come into contact with the distal end 15081 of the cartridge 15080 when the stop 15090 reaches the fully closed position. The carriage 15180 can be distally extended until it reaches its extreme distal position and / or the stop 15090 reaches its fully closed position, shown in FIG. 118. In various circumstances, the carriage 15180 may come into contact and close the end of travel sensor when the carriage 15180 reaches its extreme distal position. In some embodiments, the end-of-stroke sensor may be in communication for transmitting a signal to the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 15010. When the end-of-stroke sensor is closed by carriage 15180, the microprocessor can interrupt the power supply to the closing motor 15110 and stop the extension of the carriage 15180.

As described above, the cross bar 15181 of the carriage 15180 can move the stop 15090 on the cam toward the cassette 15080 with brackets, pushing the cam surface 15092 down. The stop 15090 may further comprise a snap pin 15210 extending from its sides, which can be received in the grooves 15215 formed on the sides of the channel 15070 of the cassette when the stop 15090 is rotated to the cassette 15080 with brackets. In various embodiments, the latch pin 15210 may come into contact with the closed ends of the slots 15215, for example, when the emphasis 15090 reaches the closed position. In some embodiments, the stop 15090 may be in the closed position, and the latch pin 15210 may not come into contact with the closed ends of the slots 15215. In some embodiments, the closure system may include one or more latches 15190 configured to engage with the latch pin 15210 and / or move the stop 15090 closer to cassette 15080. The latches 15190 can be rotatably connected to the cassette channel 15070 using the hinge pin 15191, and can be rotated around the axis of the hinge by interacting with the latch pin 15210. In some embodiments, the latches 15190 can catch the latch pin 15210 and place the latch pin 15210 close to the closed end 15215. Each latch 15190 may include a latch shoulder 15192 that can slide along the latch pin 15210 and push the latch pin 15210 down while the latch 15190 is rotated distally to the closed position e. Each latch arm 15192 may form at least a portion of the latch groove 15193, which may be configured to receive the latch pin 15210 by moving the latch 15190 to the activated positions. The latch arms 15192 and the closed ends of the slots 15215 during engagement can grab and / or hold the latch pin 15210 in position.

In addition to the above, the latches 15190 can be moved between the non-locked position (FIG. 117) and the locked position (FIG. 118) by the carriage 15180 while the carriage 15180 is distally extended. The latches 15190 can move the stop 15090 to the fully closed position by the distance that the stop 15090 is not moved to the fully closed position by means of the cross bar 15181. In various embodiments, the carriage 15180 may include distal cam surfaces 15182, which can interact with the latches 15190 when extended Carriage 15180 distally. In at least one such embodiment, each cam surface 15182 may comprise, for example, an oblique or inclined surface. When the spindle 15170 of the closing actuator is turned in the second direction and the carriage 15180 is proximal retracted by the spindle 15170 of the closing actuator, the latches 15190 can return to inactive positions. In various embodiments, tool 15010 may further comprise, for example, one or more biasing springs 15195, which may be configured to pivot latches 15190 in the proximal direction when distal cam surfaces 15182 are retracted from latches 15190. Each latch 15190 may include a hole 15194 formed to receive the first end of the spring 15195. The second end of each spring 15195 can be connected to a spring support 15079 passing from the channel 15070 of the cartridge. When the latches 15190 are distally rotated from the non-locked position to the latched position by means of the carriage 15180, as described above, the springs 15195 can elastically stretch so that when the carriage 15180 is pulled in, the springs 15195 can resiliently return to their original state, thus applying a force to the latches 15090, for example, through holes 15194. In any case, when the latches 15190 have returned to the unlocked position, the stop 15090 can again be moved relative to the cassette 15080 with brackets.

As described above, the cross bar 15181 of the carriage 15180 can come into contact with the cam surface 15092 of the stop 15090 and rotate the stop 15090 towards the cassette 15080 with brackets. The carriage 15180 can also be configured to pivot the stop 15090 from the cartridge 15080 with brackets. In at least one such embodiment, a second cam surface 15093 may be formed on the abutment 15090, which may come into contact with the cross bar 15181 of the carriage 15080 when the carriage 150x is proximally moved by the spindle 15170 of the closing drive. It should be understood that the closing cam surface 15092 may be formed on the first side of the hinge pin 15200, and the opening cam surface 15093 may be formed on the second, opposite side of the hinge pin 15200. The opening cam surface 15093 may extend at an angle relative to the closing cam surface 15092 In various embodiments, the cross bar 15181 may come into contact and slide relative to the opening cam surface 15093 while retracting the carriage 15180. Opening ulachkovaya surface 15093 can be configured such that the degree or magnitude of the stop opening with respect 15090 15080 staple cartridge depends on the distance at which the transverse strap 15181 retracts proximally. For example, if the transverse bar 15181 is retracted proximal to the hinge 15200 by a first distance, the transverse bar 15181 can rotate the stop 15090 upward, from the cassette 15080 with brackets, by a first amount, and if the transverse bar 15181 is retracted proximal to the hinge 14200 by a second distance greater than the first distance , then the transverse bar 15181 can rotate the stop 15090 upward, from the cassette 15080 with brackets, a second value greater than the first value.

The closure system described above can allow the surgical instrument user to rotate the stop 15090 between the open and closed positions without the need for manual manipulation of the stop 15090. The closure system described above can also lock or lock the stop 15090 in the closed position automatically, without requiring a separate actuator. If the user is not satisfied with the position of the fabric between the stop 15090 and the cassette 15080 with the brackets when the stop 15090 is in the closed position, the user can again open the stop 15090, reposition the stop 15090 and the cassette 15080 with brackets relative to the fabric, and then close the stop 15090 again. User can open and close the stop 15090 as many times as needed before activating the tool starting system 15010. The starting system may include a starting engine 15120 mounted on the engine frame 15125, a starting gear assembly an ode operably connected to the starting motor 15120, and comprising a starting gear 15240, a gear 15250 of a starting screw of a starting drive, and a leading screw 15260 of a starting drive. Similar to the above, the start gear assembly and / or the start drive spindle 15260 can be rotatably held on the engine frame 15125. The trigger actuator may further comprise a trigger mechanism 15055, configured to close the trigger switch 15290 by pressing the trigger mechanism 15055 to actuate the trigger motor 15120. When actuating the trigger motor 15120 in the first direction with the rotation of the lead screw 15260 of the trigger in the first direction , the starter drive can accommodate staples stored with the possibility of extraction in the cassette 15080 with brackets, and cut the tissue caught between the stop 15090 and the cassette 15080 with brackets. When actuating the starting motor 15120 in the second direction with the rotation of the lead screw 15260 of the starting actuator in the second, opposite direction, the starting actuator can be retracted. After this, the stop 15090 can be opened again to remove tissue from the space between the stop 15090 and the cassette with brackets 15080. In some cases, it may not be necessary to retract the trigger to open the stop 15090. In such embodiments, the trigger may not interact with the stop 15090 with its distal nomination. In at least one such embodiment, the trigger drive can enter the cassette 15080 with brackets and push the brackets out of it, and the cutting edge of the scalpel can move between the cassette 15080 with brackets and the stop 15090 and cut the fabric. The trigger actuator may not lock the stop 15090 in the closed position, although embodiments are provided in which the trigger actuator may block the emphasis 15090 in the closed position. In such embodiments, for example, an I-element can be used that can interact with an emphasis 15090 and a cassette with brackets 15080 and hold them in position relative to each other as the I-element moves distally.

Tool 15010 may receive power from an external power source and / or an internal power source. The cable may enter the actuator housing 15080 and supply power, for example, from an external power source. One or more batteries, such as, for example, battery 15400, can be located inside the handle of the tool 15010, providing power, for example, from an internal source. Tool 15010 may further comprise one or more indicators, such as, for example, LED indicator 15100, which may indicate the operating status of tool 15010. LED indicator 15100 may operate in the same or similar manner as, for example, LED 11100 described above. LED indicator 15100 may be in communication for signal transmission with the microcontroller of the instrument 15010, which may be located, for example, on a printed circuit board 15500.

Previous surgical instruments used a closing system with a manual drive, made with the possibility of moving the stop between the open position and the closed position. In various embodiments described herein, a drive-closing system is used that is capable of moving a stop between an open position and a closed position relative to a fixed cassette with brackets. Other embodiments are provided in which the stop can be fixed, and the closing system with a drive can move the cassette with brackets between the closed and open positions. In any case, the engine of the closing system can define a fabric gap between the stop and the cassette with brackets. In various embodiments, the surgical instrument closure system is separate and distinct from the launch system. In other embodiments, the closing and starting systems may be a single unit. When the closing system and the launch system are separated and different, the user of the surgical instrument can evaluate the position of the stop and the cassette with staples relative to the stitched and cut tissue before starting the launch system.

As described above, a trigger effector of a surgical instrument, such as, for example, trigger effector 1000, may be configured to clamp tissue between its abutment jaw 1040 and the cassette 1060 with brackets. When the stop jaw 1040 is in the closed position, a tissue gap is formed between the stop jaw 1040 and the cassette cassette 1060. In some embodiments, the end effector 1000 may be suitable for use with thin fabric, thick fabric, and intermediate thickness fabric between the thin and thick fabric. The thinnest and thickest tissue that the end effector 1000 is suitable for can form a tissue thickness range for the end effector 1000. In various embodiments, the surgical instrument system may include a handle and several end effectors that can be attached to the handle, moreover one or more end effectors may have different ranges of tissue thickness. For example, the first end effector may have a first tissue thickness range, and the second end effector may have a second tissue thickness range different from the first tissue thickness range. In some embodiments, the first tissue thickness range and the second tissue thickness range may be separate, while in other embodiments, the first tissue thickness range and the second tissue thickness range may overlap. Surgical instrument systems may use any suitable number of end effectors having different tissue thickness ranges, some of the tissue thickness ranges may at least partially overlap, and other tissue thickness ranges may not overlap at all.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the cassette with the brackets of the end effector, such as, for example, the cassette 1060 with the brackets of the end effector 1000, may be replaceable. In various embodiments, the cassette 1060 with brackets may be removably secured within the lower jaw 1020 of the end effector 1000. After the removable fixation, the platform or the tissue contact surface of the cassette 1060 may not move or at least not substantially move relative to the lower jaw 1020. Thus, when the stop jaw 1040 moves toward the closed position between the stop jaw 1040 and the platform surface of the cassette 1060 with brackets, a fixed distance or fabric can form Gap clearance. To change this fixed distance, the cassette 1060 with brackets can be removed from the lower jaw 1020 and another cassette with brackets can be released inside the lower jaw 1020. The surface of the platform of another cassette with brackets can be configured to form a tissue gap other than the gap provided by the cassette 1060 with brackets. Embodiments are provided in which a surgical instrument system includes a handle, a plurality of end effectors that can be assembled on the handle, and a plurality of cassettes with brackets that can be interchangeably inserted into the end effectors. This embodiment allows the user to select an end effector suitable for use with a certain range of tissue thicknesses, and a cassette with brackets selected for use with an end effector allows you to adjust or fine-tune the thickness of the fabric that the end effector can stitch. In some embodiments, the first staple cartridge of the surgical instrument system may include a first type of staple, and the second staple cartridge may include a second type of staple. For example, the first cassette with brackets may include staples having a first height in an unformed or inactive state, and the second cassette with brackets can include staples having a second height in an unformed or unactivated state other than the first height.

Full description:

US patent No. 5,403,312, entitled "ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC DEVICE", issued April 4, 1995;

US Patent No. 7,000,818, entitled “SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING SEPARATE SEPARATED CLOSING AND STARTING SYSTEMS”, issued February 21, 2006;

US Patent No. 7,422,139, entitled “SURGICAL CUTTING AND STITCHING TOOL WITH DRIVE AND TACTICAL FEEDBACK”, issued September 9, 2008;

US patent No. 7,464,849, entitled "ELECTROMECHANICAL SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH A CLOSING SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS OF ALIGNMENT OF SUPPORT", issued December 16, 2008;

US patent No. 7,670,334, entitled "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING A HINGED END EFFECTOR", issued March 2, 2010;

US Patent No. 7,753,245, entitled "SURGICAL BINDING INSTRUMENTS", issued July 13, 2010;

US patent No. 8,393,514, entitled "SELECTIVELY FUNCTIONING IMPLANTABLE FASTENING CASSETTE" issued March 12, 2013;

US patent application Ser. No. 11 / 343,803, entitled “SURGICAL TOOL WITH RECORDING OPPORTUNITY”, filed January 31, 2006, currently US Patent No. 7,845,537;

US Patent Application No. 12 / 031,573, entitled “SURGICAL CUTTING AND STITCHING TOOL HAVING RF ELECTRODES”, filed February 14, 2008;

US patent application Ser. No. 12 / 031,873, entitled “END EFFECTORS FOR SURGICAL CUTTING AND BINDING INSTRUMENT”, filed February 15, 2008, currently US Patent No. 7,980,443;

US patent application Ser. No. 12 / 235,782, entitled “SURGICAL CUTTING TOOL WITH A DRIVE”, filed September 23, 2008, currently US Patent No. 8,210,411;

US patent application Ser. No. 12 / 249,117, entitled “SURGICAL CUTTING AND STITCHING MACHINE WITH POWER SUPPLY AND THE POSSIBILITY OF MANUALLY RETRIEVING THE STARTING SYSTEM”, filed October 10, 2008, US Patent No. 8,608,045;

US patent application Ser. No. 12 / 647,100, entitled “SURGICAL CUTTING TOOL WITH A DRIVE AND ELECTRICAL EXECUTIVE CONTROL UNIT FOR THE EXECUTIVE MECHANISM” filed December 24, 2009, US Patent No. 8,220,688;

US patent application Ser. No. 12 / 893,461, entitled “CARTRIDGE WITH BRACKETS”, filed September 29, 2012, the current publication of the application for US patent No. 2012/0074198;

US patent application Ser. No. 13 / 036,647, entitled “SURGICAL STAPLING TOOL”, filed February 28, 2011, currently US Patent No. 8,561,870;

US patent application Ser. No. 13 / 118,241, entitled “SURGICAL STITCHING TOOLS WITH TURNING CONFIGURATIONS FOR PLACING BRACKETS”, US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0298719;

US patent application Ser. No. 13 / 524,049, entitled “HINGED TURNING SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTAINING THE START-UP DRIVE”, filed June 15, 2012, currently publishing US Patent Application No. 2013/0334278;

US patent application Ser. No. 13 / 800,025, entitled “FABRIC THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM IN THE CARTRIDGE WITH BRACKETS”, filed March 13, 2013;

US patent application Ser. No. 13/800 067, entitled “FABRIC THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM IN THE CARTRIDGE WITH BRACKETS”, filed March 13, 2013;

US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0175955, entitled “SURGICAL CUTTING AND STITCHING TOOL WITH LOCKING CLOSURE LOCKING MECHANISM”, filed January 31, 2006; and

US Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0264194, entitled “SURGICAL STAPLING TOOL WITH HINGE-TAPING END EFFECTOR”, filed April 22, 2010, currently US Patent No. 8,308,040, incorporated herein by reference.

As described previously, the sensors may be configured to detect and collect data associated with a surgical device. The processor processes the data received from the sensor (s).

The processor may be configured to execute functional logic instructions. A processor may be any of several single core or multi core processors known in the art. The memory may be a volatile or non-volatile storage device configured to store a permanent and temporary (working) copy of the functional logic commands.

In various embodiments, the functional logic may be configured to process data associated with the movements, as described above. In various embodiments, functional logic may be configured to perform primary processing and data transmission to a computer containing an application for determining and generating instructions. For these embodiments, the functional logic may be further configured to receive information from the host computer and transmit feedback data to the host computer. In alternative embodiments, the functional logic may be configured to assume a more important role in receiving information and generating feedback. In any case, regardless of whether the functional logic performs this on its own or in response to computer instructions, the functional logic can be additionally performed with the ability to control and transmit feedback data to the user.

In various embodiments, functional logic may be implemented in instructions supported by the processor instruction system architecture (ISA), or in higher-level languages compiled into a supported ISA architecture. Functional logic may contain one or more logical blocks or modules. Functional logic can be implemented in an object-oriented manner. Functional logic may be configured to be executed in a multi-tasking and / or multi-threaded manner. In other embodiments, functional logic may be implemented in hardware such as a gate array.

In various embodiments, the communication interface may be configured to facilitate communication between the peripheral device and the computer system. Communication may include transmitting the collected biometric data related to the position, posture and / or movement of part (s) of the user's body to the host computer, and transmitting tactile feedback from the host computer to the peripheral device. In various embodiments, the communication interface may be a wired or wireless communication interface. For example, a wired communication interface may include, but is not limited to, a universal serial bus (USB) interface. For example, a wireless communication interface may include, without limitation, a Bluetooth interface.

In various embodiments, the processor may be enclosed in a single package with functional logic. In various embodiments, the processor may be installed in a single package along with functional logic to form a single-case system (System-in-Package, SiP). In various embodiments, the processor may be integrated into a single integrated circuit chip with functional logic. In various embodiments, the processor may be installed together with the functional logic to form a single-chip system (System on Chip, SoC).

Various embodiments may be described herein in the general context of executable instructions for a computer, such as software, program modules, and / or subsystems executed by a processor. Essentially, software, program modules and / or subsystems include any program element that is designed to perform specific operations or implement certain abstract data types. Software, program modules and / or subsystems may include procedures, programs, objects, components, data structures, etc. that perform specific tasks and implement certain abstract data types. The implementation of software components and methods, software modules and / or subsystems may be stored and / or transmitted through some form of computer-readable medium. In this regard, the computer-readable medium may be any existing information storage medium or media available for a computer device. Some embodiments may also be used in distributed computing environments in which operations are performed by one or more remote devices connected by a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, software, program modules, and / or subsystems can be located in both local and remote computer storages, including memory devices. To store information and instructions executed by the processor, you can use random access memory (RAM) or other dynamic storage device. Memory can also be used to store temporary variables or other intermediate information when executing instructions executed by the processor.

Although some embodiments may be shown and described as containing functional components, software, subsystems and / or modules performing various operations, it should be understood that such components or modules may be implemented using one or more hardware components, software components and / or combinations thereof. Functional components, software, subsystems and / or modules can be implemented, for example, through logic (e.g. instructions, data and / or code) intended for execution by a logical device (e.g., processor). Such logic may be stored on one or more computer-readable media, internal or external to the logical device. In other embodiments, functional components, such as software, motors, and / or modules, may be implemented by hardware elements, which may include processors, microprocessors, circuits, circuit elements (e.g., transistors, resistors, capacitors, induction coils, and etc.), integrated circuits, specialized integrated circuits (SIS), programmable logic devices (PLUs), processors for processing digital signals (DSP), user-programmable gate arrays ci (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor devices, crystals, microcrystals, the crystals kits and t. d.

Examples of software, subsystems and / or modules may include software components, programs, applications, computer programs, application programs, system programs, machine programs, operating system software, middleware, firmware, program modules, standard programs , routines, functions, methods, procedures, program interfaces, application programming interfaces (APIs), instruction sets, computational code, computer th code, code segments, computer code segments, words, values, symbols, or any combination thereof. The choice of implementation of an embodiment using hardware elements and / or program elements may depend on any number of factors, such as the desired computation speed, power value, heat resistance, computational cycle budget, data input rate, data output rate, memory resources, bus speed data and other design or performance limitations.

One or more of the modules described herein may comprise one or more embedded applications implemented as firmware, software, hardware, or any combination thereof. One or more of the modules described herein may comprise various executable modules, such as software, programs, data, drivers, application interfaces, and so on. The firmware may be stored in the memory of the controller 2016 and / or controller 2022, which may contain non-volatile memory, for example, read-only bitwise masked memory (ROM) or flash memory. In various embodiments, storing the firmware in the ROM may free up flash memory. Non-volatile memory may contain other types of memory, including, for example, programmable ROM (EPROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM) or random access memory (RAM) with redundancy from the battery, such as dynamic memory (DZU), dynamic random access memory with double data transfer speed and / or synchronous dynamic random access memory.

In some cases, various embodiments may be implemented as an industrial product. An industrial product may include a computer-readable storage medium capable of storing logic, instructions and / or data for performing various operations of one or more embodiments. For example, in various embodiments, the manufacturing product may be a magnetic disk, optical disk, flash memory, or firmware containing computer program instructions suitable for execution by a general purpose processor or a specialized processor. However, these embodiments of the invention are not limited to this field of use.

The functions of various functional elements, logic blocks, modules, and circuit elements described herein may be implemented in the general context of computer-executable instructions, such as software, control modules, logic, and / or logic modules, executed by a processor. Essentially, software, control modules, logic, and / or logic modules are any software element designed to perform specific operations. Software, control modules, and / or logical modules may contain procedures, programs, objects, components, data structures, etc. that perform specific tasks and implement certain abstract data types. The implementation of software, control modules, logic, and / or logic modules and methods may be stored and / or transmitted through some form of computer-readable medium. In this regard, the computer-readable medium may be any existing information storage medium or media available for a computer device. Some embodiments may also be used in distributed computing environments in which operations are performed by one or more remote devices connected by a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, software, logic control modules, and / or logic modules can be located in both local and remote computer storages, including memory devices.

Furthermore, it should be understood that the embodiments described herein show implementation examples, and that functional elements, logic blocks, modules, and circuit elements can be implemented in various other ways that are also consistent with the described embodiments. In addition, operations performed by such functional elements, logic blocks, modules, and circuit elements may be combined and / or shared in a particular implementation, and may be performed by a larger or smaller number of components or modules. As will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art while reading this summary, each of the individual embodiments described and shown herein has discrete components and features that can be easily separated or combined with elements of any of the other several aspects without departing from the scope of the present inventions. Any described method can be carried out in the described order of events or in any other logically possible order.

It should be noted that any reference to the phrases “one embodiment” or “embodiment” means that the particular element, structure, or characteristic described in connection with this embodiment is contained in at least one embodiment. All phrases “in one embodiment” or “in one aspect” appearing in this specification do not necessarily refer to one embodiment.

Unless otherwise specifically indicated, it should be understood that terms such as “processing”, “calculation”, “calculation”, “determination”, etc., refer to the action and / or processes of a computer or computing system, or similar electronic computer devices such as a general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, logic element on discrete components or transistor oh, discrete hardware components or any combination of them, which device is designed to perform the functions described in this document, and which manipulates and / or converts data presented in the form of physical quantities (for example, electronic) inside the registers and / or memory into other data similarly presented inside the memory, registers or other devices for storing, transmitting and displaying information.

It should be noted that embodiments can be described by the terms “connected” and “connected”, as well as their derivatives. Such terms are not synonymous. For example, some embodiments may be described using the terms “connected” and / or “connected”, indicating that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact with each other. However, the term “articulated” can also mean that two or more elements are indirectly in contact with each other, but still interact or coordinate their work with each other. As applied to program elements, for example, the term “connected” can refer to interfaces, message interfaces, application programming interfaces (APIs), messaging, etc.

It should be borne in mind that any patent, publication or other description material, fully or partially incorporated herein by reference, is included in it only to the extent that the material included does not contradict the existing definitions, claims or other description materials presented in the present description . Thus, to the extent necessary, the disclosure, as explicitly presented herein, takes precedence over any conflicting material incorporated herein by reference. Any material or part thereof, indicated as incorporated herein by reference, but contrary to existing definitions, provisions, or other description material presented herein, will be included in this document only to the extent that between the included material and the existing description material no contradictions arise.

The described embodiments are used in conventional endoscopic and open surgical instruments, and are also used in automatic operations.

The device options described herein may be designed for disposal after a single use, or for repeated use. Variants of devices, in one or both cases, can be prepared for reuse. Preparation for reuse may include any combination of the steps of disassembling the device, then cleaning or replacing specific fragments and subsequent reassembly. In particular, device variants may be disassembled to replace any number of specific parts or parts in any combination. After cleaning and (or) replacing certain parts, the device can be assembled for subsequent use in a special department that prepares for reuse or by the surgical team before surgery. Those skilled in the art will understand that preparing a device for reuse may include various disassembly, cleaning / replacing, and reassembly techniques. The use of such techniques, as well as the resulting reconditioned device are included in the scope of this application.

By way of example, the options described herein may be practiced prior to surgery. Firstly, a new or used tool can be obtained and processed if necessary. The device can be sterilized. According to one sterilization method, the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, for example a plastic bag or a Tyvek bag (TYVEK). The container and the device can be placed in a radiation field that can penetrate into the container, for example, gamma radiation, X-rays or high-energy electrons. Radiation can kill bacteria on the surface of the device and in the tank. The sterilized instrument can be stored in a sterile container. A sealed container can keep the instrument sterile until it becomes necessary to use it in a medical facility. The device can also be sterilized using any other technique known in the art, including, but not limited to, beta or gamma radiation, ethylene oxide or steam.

One skilled in the art will understand that the components described herein (eg, operations), devices, objects, and the accompanying description are used as examples for conceptual clarity and that various configuration modifications are allowed. Consequently, the specific examples and accompanying descriptions given in this document are considered to be representatives of their more general classes. As a rule, the use of any particular example is considered to be representative of its class, and the non-exclusion of specific components (eg, operations), devices, and objects should not be considered limiting.

With regard to the use of essentially any plural and / or singular cases for terms herein, those skilled in the art may change the plural to the singular and / or singular to the plural in accordance with the requirements of the context and / or scope. The various singular / plural combinations are not expressly indicated herein for clarity.

The subject matter described herein sometimes illustrates various components contained within or connected to various other components. It should be understood that such architectures shown are merely examples and that many other architectures with the same functionality may actually be implemented. In a conceptual sense, any configuration of components to achieve the same functionality is practically “connected” in such a way as to achieve the desired functionality. Thus, any two components combined in this document to achieve specific functionality can be considered as “connected” to each other so that the desired functionality is achieved, regardless of architecture or intermediate components. Similarly, any two components connected in this way can be considered as “functionally connected” or “functionally connected” to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components that can be connected in this way can also be considered as “functionally connected” each other to achieve the desired functionality. Specific examples of functionally coupled components include, but are not limited to, physically mating and / or physically interacting components and / or wirelessly interacting and / or logically interacting and / or logically interacting components.

Some aspects can be described by the terms “articulated” and “connected”, as well as their derivatives. It should be understood that such terms are not synonymous. For example, some aspects may be described using the term “connected”, meaning that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact with each other. In another example, some aspects may be described using the term “articulated,” meaning that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact. However, the term “articulated” can also mean that two or more elements are indirectly in contact with each other, but still interact or coordinate their work with each other.

In some examples, one or more of the components may be described herein as “configured,” “configured for,” “functioning / functional for,” “adapted / adapted,” “capable,” “consistent / relevant,” and so on. .d. Those skilled in the art will understand that the term may encompass active and / or inactive components and / or components in standby mode, unless the context requires otherwise.

Although specific aspects of the present subject matter described in this document have been shown and described, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that based on the methods described herein, changes and modifications can be made and such changes and modifications will not constitute a departure from the subject the invention described herein, and its extended aspects, and therefore the appended claims, are intended to cover all such changes and modifications as are yayut true spirit and scope of the object of the invention described herein. Those skilled in the art will understand that in general terms used in this document, and especially in the appended claims (eg, the main content of the appended claims), generally imply their use in an “open” sense (for example, the term “including” should be interpreted as “including without limitation”, the term “having” should be interpreted as “having at least”, the term “containing” should be interpreted as “containing without limitation I ", etc.). In addition, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that if, to a specific extent, reference is made to the presented claims, such a purpose will be explicitly stated in such a claim, and in the absence of such a reference, such a purpose is not implied. For example, for ease of understanding, note that the following appended claims may use introductory phrases of “at least one” or “one or more” to represent the claims. However, the use of such phrases should not be taken as an indication that the introduction of the singular refers to any particular claim containing such a mention only to paragraphs containing only one such mention, even if the same paragraph includes introductory phrases “ one or more ”or“ at least one ”, and the singular should generally be interpreted as meaning“ at least one ”or“ one or more ”; the same applies to references using the definitions of “this,” “given,” and “present.”

In addition, even if a certain amount of the presented claim is cited explicitly, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that such citation should generally be interpreted in view of at least the amount quoted (for example, simply quoting the phrase “two statements "Without other modifiers, as a rule, means at least two statements or two or more statements). In addition, in cases of using traditional analogs, the phrases “at least one of A, B, C, etc.,” as a rule, imply that specialists in the art will be able to understand the traditional analogy (for example, “a system having at least at least one of A, B, and C ”will contain, without limitation, systems that have only A, only B, only C, and B together, and A and C together, and B and C together and / or A, B , and C together, etc.). In cases where traditional analogs are used, the phrases “at least one of A, B or C, etc.” generally imply that those skilled in the art will be able to understand the traditional analogy (for example, “a system having at least one of A , B or C ”will contain, without limitation, systems that have only A, only B, only C, and B together, and A and C together, and B and C together and / or A, B, and C together and etc.). In addition, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that, as a rule, a disjunctive word and / or phrase, representing two or more alternative terms, whether in the description of the invention, claims or in the drawings, should be understood as meaning the possibility of including one of the terms, any of the terms, or both of these terms, unless the context requires otherwise. For example, the phrase “A or B” will usually mean the inclusion of the capabilities “A” or “B” or “A and B”.

With respect to the appended claims, those skilled in the art will understand that the operations referred to therein can essentially be performed in any order. Also, although various operating flows are presented as a sequence (s), it should be understood that various operations may be performed in a different order than that shown, or may be performed simultaneously. Examples of such alternative orders may include overlapping, intermittent, interruptible, tunable, incremental, preliminary, additional, simultaneous, reverse, or other variants of the order, unless the context requires otherwise. Moreover, it is assumed that terms such as “sensitive to”, “associated with” or other adjectives related to the past tense essentially do not exclude such options, unless the context requires otherwise.

In general, the use of the principles of the present invention described herein provides many advantages. The above description of one or more embodiments has been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is believed that the description is not an exhaustive or limiting exact disclosed option. In light of the foregoing, modifications and variations are possible. One or more embodiments have been selected and described to illustrate the principles and methods of practical implementation, whereby allowing a person skilled in the art to use various embodiments of the invention, as well as various modifications corresponding to the particular intended field of application. It is assumed that the full scope of the invention is defined in the attached claims.

Claims (39)

1. A surgical end effector for use with a surgical instrument, the surgical end effector comprising: the end effector body, made with the possibility of functional connection to a surgical instrument; a first drive system of the end effector, functionally supported by the body of the end effector and configured to linearly move the first actuator of the end effector between the first linear position and the second linear position in response to the first rotational movements applied to it by a surgical instrument; a second drive system of the end effector, functionally supported by the body of the end effector and configured to linearly move the second actuator of the end effector between the initial and final position in response to the second rotational movements applied to it by a surgical instrument; a first status node operably cooperating with the first drive system of the end effector and the body of the end effector to provide a first indication indicating the linear arrangement of the first actuator of the end effector on the body of the end effector; and a second status node operably interacting with the second end effector drive system and the end effector housing to provide a second indication indicating the linear arrangement of the second actuator of the end effector on the end effector body. 2. The effector according to claim 1, in which the first drive system of the end effector comprises a first drive shaft of the end effector, rotatably supported by the body of the end effector and forming a first axis of the shaft, the first drive shaft of the end effector includes a first connector configured for detachable functional connection with the plot of the first rotational drive system of the surgical instrument. 3. The effector according to claim 2, wherein the first drive shaft of the end effector is threaded, and wherein the first drive system of the end effector further comprises a first nut in threaded engagement with the first drive shaft of the end effector, the first nut is operatively connected to the first actuator end effector. 4. The effector according to claim 3, in which the first status node contains a first indicator element on the first nut, which is visible through the first indicator window in the end effector housing. 5. The effector according to claim 4, further comprising: first and second pointing devices on the end effector housing adjacent to the first indicator window; and the first indicator mark on the first indicator element so that the position of the first indicator mark relative to the first and second indicating devices indicates a different position of the first actuator of the end effector between the first linear position and the second linear position. 6. The effector according to claim 1, in which the second drive system of the end effector comprises a second drive shaft of the end effector, rotatably supported by the body of the end effector and forming a second axis of the shaft that is parallel to the first axis of the shaft, the second drive shaft of the end effector includes a second connector, made with the possibility of detachable functional connection with the plot of the second rotational drive system of the surgical instrument. 7. The effector according to claim 6, in which the second drive shaft of the end effector is threaded and the second drive system of the end effector further comprises a second nut in threaded interaction with the second drive shaft of the end effector, the second nut is operatively connected to the second actuator of the end effector. 8. The effector according to claim 7, in which the second status node contains a second indicator element on the second nut, which is visible through the second indicator window in the end effector housing. 9. The effector according to claim 8, further comprising a third and fourth indicating device on the end effector housing adjacent to the second indicator window and a second indicator mark on the second indicator element so that the position of the second indicator mark relative to the third and fourth indicating devices indicates another the position of the second actuator of the end effector between the initial and final positions. 10. The effector according to claim 1, in which the first actuator of the end effector contains an elongated first section protruding from the body of the end effector, and the second actuator of the end effector contains an elongated second section protruding from the body of the end effector, and wherein the first and second pointing devices are provided on the end effector body, and not on the elongated first and second sections. 11. A surgical end effector for use with a surgical instrument, the surgical end effector comprising: tool head end effector containing: a supporting structure configured to provide functional support for the cassette with brackets; a thrust section functionally supported in a position opposite the supporting structure, while the surgical end effector further comprises: the end effector body, made with the possibility of functional connection to a surgical instrument; a closing drive system functionally supported in the end effector housing and configured to receive first rotational movements from the surgical instrument, while connecting the end effector housing to the surgical instrument, while the closing drive system is operable to interact with the closing bolt assembly that is connected to the thrust section for linear movement of the thrust section between the open and closed positions when applying the first rotate flax movements to the closing drive system; a trigger actuator system functionally supported in the end effector housing and configured to receive second rotational movements from the surgical instrument by connecting the end effector housing to the surgical instrument, wherein the trigger actuator system is operable to interact with the trigger rod assembly cooperating with the supporting structure, for linear movement of the launch rod, and the supporting structure is attached to the starting actuator a system between the non-activated position and the activated position, the brackets being able to extend from the cassette with brackets into forming contact with the thrust section when applying second rotational movements to the starting drive system; a closing status node operably interacting with the closing drive system and the end effector housing to provide a closing indication indicating a linear arrangement of the closing bolt assembly on the end effector housing; and a trigger indicator element operatively interacting with the trigger drive system and the end effector housing to provide a trigger indication indicating the linear location of the trigger rod assembly between inactive and activated positions on the end effector housing. 12. The effector according to claim 11, in which the closing drive system includes a closing shaft, rotatably supported by the end effector housing and forming a first axis of the shaft, the closing shaft includes a first connector configured to detachably connect to a portion of the first rotational drive system surgical instrument. 13. The effector according to claim 12, wherein the closure shaft is threaded, and wherein the closure drive system further comprises a closure nut in threaded engagement with the closure shaft, the closure nut is operatively connected to the closure bolt assembly. 14. The effector according to claim 13, wherein the closing status node comprises a closing indicator element on the closing nut, which is visible through the closing indicator window in the end effector body. 15. The effector according to claim 14, further comprising a first and a second pointing device on the end effector housing adjacent to the closing indicator window and closing the indicator mark on the closing indicator element, so that the position of the closing indicator mark relative to the first and second indicating devices is indicator of another linear position of the closing bolt assembly. 16. The effector according to claim 11, in which the starting drive system comprises a starting shaft, rotatably supported by the end effector housing and forming a second axis of the shaft that is parallel to the first axis of the shaft, the starting shaft includes a second connector configured for detachable functional connection with the plot of the second rotational drive system of the surgical instrument. 17. The effector according to claim 16, wherein the starting shaft is threaded, and wherein the starting drive system further comprises a starting nut in threaded interaction with the starting shaft, the starting nut is operatively connected to the starting bolt assembly. 18. The effector according to claim 17, in which the trigger indicator element is located on the closing nut and is visible through the trigger indicator window in the case of the end effector. 19. The effector according to claim 11, wherein the closing indication is provided on the end effector housing, and not on the closing bolt assembly, and wherein the start indication is provided on the end effector housing, and not on the starting rod assembly. 20. A surgical end effector for use with a surgical instrument, the surgical end effector comprising: the end effector body, made with the possibility of functional connection to a surgical instrument; a first drive system of the end effector, configured to linearly move the first actuator of the end effector between the first linear position and the second linear position in response to the first rotational movements applied to it by a surgical instrument; a second drive system of the end effector, made with the possibility of linear movement of the second actuator of the end effector between the initial and final positions in response to the second rotational movements applied to it by a surgical instrument; and means interacting with the first drive system of the end effector and the second drive system of the end effector to provide an indication indicating the linear arrangement of the first actuator of the end effector and the second actuator of the end effector on the body of the end effector.

Images